WO2023233506A1 - Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program - Google Patents

Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023233506A1
WO2023233506A1 PCT/JP2022/022082 JP2022022082W WO2023233506A1 WO 2023233506 A1 WO2023233506 A1 WO 2023233506A1 JP 2022022082 W JP2022022082 W JP 2022022082W WO 2023233506 A1 WO2023233506 A1 WO 2023233506A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
article
information
display
stencil
display area
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/022082
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
多一郎 福田
淳治 伊勢
良和 高橋
Original Assignee
日本製鉄株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日本製鉄株式会社 filed Critical 日本製鉄株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2022/022082 priority Critical patent/WO2023233506A1/en
Priority to JP2023577460A priority patent/JPWO2023233506A5/en
Publication of WO2023233506A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023233506A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/08Logistics, e.g. warehousing, loading or distribution; Inventory or stock management

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an article management device, an article management method, a data structure of article management data, and a program, and is particularly suitable for use in managing articles.
  • the position of objects such as steel products such as thick plates is managed.
  • the position of the steel plate is managed by registering the XY coordinates of the overhead crane when the steel plate is lowered together with the steel plate number of the steel plate.
  • a fixed location calculation program calculates a fixed location for steel materials indicated by three-dimensional coordinates,
  • the fixed location information indicating the calculated fixed location is stored in association with the steel material identification information of the steel material.
  • the information used to manage the position of the steel plate is the XY coordinates of the overhead crane. For this reason, the position of articles can only be managed within the range that can be transported by an overhead crane. Furthermore, with the technology described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to specify the Z coordinate from the XY coordinates of the overhead crane, so for example, when a plurality of steel plates are piled up, it is difficult to accurately specify the plurality of steel plates. Can not.
  • the three-dimensional coordinates of the steel material are calculated.
  • the position of the article can only be managed within the range that can be transported by the hoist.
  • the three-dimensional coordinates of the steel material calculated by the technique described in Patent Document 2 are the three-dimensional coordinates of the fixed location calculated by the fixed location calculation program. Therefore, with the technique described in Patent Document 2, the position of the steel material can be managed only at the fixed location that is predetermined by the fixed location calculation program.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to enable appropriate management of the positions of articles.
  • the article management device of the present invention is an article management device that manages the position of articles, and includes one or more image acquisition means for acquiring a captured image of an area including display information displayed on the article; identification information acquisition means for acquiring identification information of an article; and position derivation means for deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition means. and storage means for storing the information display position on the article derived by the position derivation means in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired by the identification information acquisition means. shall be.
  • the article management method of the present invention is an article management method for managing the position of an article, and includes one or more image acquisition steps of acquiring a captured image of an area including display information displayed on the article; an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article; and a position derivation step of deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired in the image acquisition step. and a storage step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position derivation step in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquisition step. shall be.
  • the data structure of the article management data of the present invention includes display information that is displayed on the article and hidden information that is not displayed on the article, and the hidden information is a three-dimensional item on which the display information is displayed.
  • the information display position is a position, and is used by an article management device to derive the information display position on the article based on a captured image of a region including display information displayed on the article.
  • the program of the present invention is a program for causing a computer to execute processing for managing the position of an article, and the program acquires one or more images of an area containing display information displayed on the article.
  • an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article, and an information display position that is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition step.
  • a storage step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position derivation step in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquisition step. It is characterized by being executed by a computer.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of products in a factory.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display area for a thick plate.
  • FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of display content using a stencil.
  • FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents by labels.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport ship.
  • FIG. 5 is a view of the plank being lifted by the cargo handling device as viewed from the direction in which the gutter extends (y-axis direction).
  • FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a first example of a thick plate conveyance mode.
  • FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a second example of the transport mode of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a first example of a thick plate conveyance mode.
  • FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a second example of the transport mode of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating a third example of the transport mode of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 6D is a diagram illustrating a fourth example of the transport mode of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 6E is a diagram illustrating a fifth example of the transport mode of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport vehicle.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which thick plates are loaded onto a transport vehicle.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a first example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a second example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a first example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a second example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in
  • FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a third example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of how a thick plate is processed in a production facility.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the original plank and the plank after cutting.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of the functional configuration of the article management device.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example of the management table.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display using the stencil.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the label in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display by the label.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of how a thick plate is processed in a production facility.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the original plank and the plank after cutting.
  • FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a first example of information stored in the management table.
  • FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a second example of information stored in the management table.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first example of processing by the article management device.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving a three-dimensional position of a display area using a stencil.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of a display area using a stencil.
  • FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of a first captured image including a display area formed by a stencil.
  • FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of the geometrical relationship between the inside of the first imaging device and the display area formed by the stencil.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the method of deriving the three-dimensional position of the display area using a stencil.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a steel frame of a structure installed on the ground.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a pipe installed underground.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a second example of the management table.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of processing by the article management device.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of the article management device.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of products in a factory to which this embodiment is applied.
  • plates manufactured at a steel mill are loaded onto a transport ship.
  • the transport ship then docks at a quay near the factory.
  • the planks are unloaded from the transport vessel and loaded onto a transport vehicle (such as a truck).
  • a transport vehicle such as a truck.
  • the plates transported by transport vehicles arrive at the factory, they are placed in a storage area within the factory.
  • the planks placed in the storage area are subjected to processes such as heat treatment and cutting (gas cutting) before being placed in the warehouse. Thereafter, the plates are shipped from the factory to customers.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display area for a thick plate.
  • the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis shown in FIG. 2 indicate the directional relationship between FIG. 2 and FIGS. 3A, 3B, 14 to 15, 18 to 19, and 21, which will be described later. , which does not necessarily correspond to the xyz coordinate directions shown in FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • the xyz coordinates are, for example, coordinates expressed in the world coordinate system.
  • a display area 201 is a stencil display area.
  • the stencil display area 201 exists on the plate surface of the thick plate.
  • the broken lines shown in FIG. 2 are virtual lines and are not actually displayed.
  • the label (side label) 202 is attached to the side surface (thick part) of the thick plate.
  • FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of display content using a stencil.
  • the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3A indicate the directional relationship with FIG. 2, etc.
  • a symbol with a black circle ( ⁇ ) inside a white circle ( ⁇ ) indicates that it goes from the back side of the page to the front side.
  • This representation of xyz coordinates is the same in other figures.
  • the stencil display includes a mark 301, a customer name 302, a standard 303, a size 304, an ID 305, a customer code 306, and an order number 307.
  • the mark 301 is a mark representing the manufacturer of the thick plate.
  • the consumer name 302 is information indicating a consumer (purchaser) of the thick plate.
  • Standard 303 is information indicating the standard of the thick plate.
  • the size 304 is information indicating the size of the thick plate (for example, thickness x width x length).
  • the ID 305 is information for uniquely identifying the thick plate, and in the example shown in FIG. 3A, it is the plate number (the identification number of the thick plate). Therefore, the same ID will not be assigned to different planks.
  • the customer code 306 is information specified by the customer to be attached to the thick plate by the manufacturer of the thick plate.
  • the order number 307 is part of a number for identifying a thick plate order from a customer.
  • the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that can be generally displayed for thick plates. Note that information other than the ID 305 does not need to be included in the stencil display. Furthermore, information other than the information described above may be included in the stencil display.
  • the number of digits of the customer code 306 differs depending on the customer, and the notation method of the standard 303 differs depending on the steelworks that manufacture thick plates. Further, for example, the order number 307 may or may not be assigned by the consumer.
  • the sizes of display items may also vary depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plates.
  • the position of the display area by the stencil may also differ depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plate. As described above, the content, position, and size of the stencil display vary depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plates, the customers, and the like.
  • the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Further, the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that can be identified by a person. Information that can be identified by a person means that a person can understand the meaning of the information when looking at the information. Information that requires machine encoding and decoding to create and read information, such as barcodes and two-dimensional codes, is not human-identifiable information.
  • the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that does not require machine decoding to read, and are at least letters, numbers, and symbols. Contains one and does not contain information that requires machine decoding to read.
  • FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents by labels.
  • the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3B indicate the directional relationship with FIG. 2, etc.
  • a symbol with an x (cross mark) inside a white circle indicates a direction from the front side to the back side of the page.
  • This representation of xyz coordinates is the same in other figures.
  • the label display includes a standard 311, an ID 312, a size 313, a delivery date 314, and a customer code 315.
  • the delivery date 314 is information indicating the delivery date of the thick plate.
  • Standard 311, ID 312, size 313, and customer code 315 are the same as standard 303, size 304, ID 305, and customer code 306, respectively. Note that information other than the ID 312 does not need to be included in the label display. Furthermore, information other than the information described above may be included in the label display. The content, position, and size of the label display also vary depending on the steel mill that manufactures the plate, the customer, etc., similar to the stencil display.
  • the meaning of the same display item for the same plate shall be the same for both stencil and label display. Therefore, when the display using the stencil shown in FIG. 3A and the display using the label shown in FIG. become something to do. Further, the standard 303 displayed by the stencil and the standard 311 displayed on the label mean the same content. The size 313 and customer code 315 also have the same meaning as the size 304 and customer code 306, respectively. As described above, the standard 303, ID 305, size 304, and customer code 306 are information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Therefore, the standard 311, ID 312, size 313, and customer code 315 are also information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Further, the thick plate delivery date 314 is also information managed by the thick plate manufacturer.
  • the standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315 are information that can be identified by a person.
  • the thick plate may be marked with markings, for example.
  • handwritten markings may be applied to the planks.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport ship.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a case where thick plates are loaded and unloaded onto and from a transport ship 400 using a gantry crane 410.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the plank 420 being lifted by the cargo handling device 411 as viewed from the direction in which the gutter 412 extends (y-axis direction). The xyz coordinates shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 indicate the orientation relationships in FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • the gantry crane 410 includes a cargo handling device (such as a trolley) 411, a girder (traversing girder) 412, and a leg structure 413. axial direction).
  • FIG. 4 shows how the plank 420 is lifted and moved by the cargo handling device 411.
  • FIG. 5 shows how the thick plate 420 is lifted by the cargo handling device 411 when viewed from the direction in which the gutter 412 extends (the y-axis direction).
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 illustrate how one thick plate 420 is lifted by the cargo handling device 411.
  • the manner in which thick plates are conveyed by the cargo handling device 411 is not limited to such a manner.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6E are diagrams showing first to fifth examples of conveyance modes for thick plates. 6A to 6E, the cargo handling device 411 is shown in a more simplified manner.
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a state in which two thick plates are arranged side by side in the horizontal plane (xy plane) and are simultaneously conveyed by the cargo handling device 411.
  • FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported on the top side (the negative direction side of the x-axis) of the cargo handling device 411.
  • FIG. 6C illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported on the bottom side (positive direction side of the x-axis) of the cargo handling device 411.
  • FIG. 6D illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported at the center of the cargo handling device 411.
  • FIG. 6E illustrates a state in which a plurality of (two) thick plates are stacked and transported simultaneously by the cargo handling device 411. In this manner, in this embodiment, a plurality of thick plates may be stacked and transported at the same time.
  • the manner in which thick plates are transported by the cargo handling device 411 is not limited. Further, the method for lifting the plank by the cargo handling device 411 may be a method using magnetic attraction of a magnet, a method using a hacker, or any other method. Since the gantry crane 410 itself can be explained using a known technique, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.
  • the thick plates manufactured at the steel mill are transported to the quay and placed at a predetermined location where they can be transported by the gantry crane 410.
  • a plurality of planks may be placed in a predetermined location in a stacked state. In some cases, the planks are placed one by one in a predetermined place.
  • the thickness (plate thickness) of several sheets of thick plates is the same is illustrated for convenience of description. However, the thicknesses of the plurality of planks may differ. That is, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks placed in a given location may differ.
  • FIG. 4 a case is illustrated in which a plurality of thick plates are placed one on top of the other so that the plate surface of the thick plate is parallel to the surface on which the thick plate is placed.
  • the method of stacking the planks is not limited to this method.
  • a plurality of planks may be placed one on top of the other so that the surface of the plank is perpendicular or nearly perpendicular to the surface on which the plank is placed. This also applies to locations other than the predetermined locations on the quay.
  • first imaging devices 430a to 430f are attached to the garter 412 and the leg structure 413.
  • the number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430f are set so that as many display areas of the plank as possible are imaged as the display area 201 of the plank stencil and the display area of the label 202 of the plank.
  • first imaging devices 430g to 430m are also attached to the cargo handling device 411.
  • the number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m are at least one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m, and the number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m are determined by the stencil display area 201 and label 202 of the plank 420 being transported by the gantry crane 410. At least one of the display areas is set to be imaged as much as possible.
  • the first imaging devices 430a to 430m are capable of adjusting imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.).
  • the adjustment of the imaging conditions may be performed by an operator (worker) operating the first imaging device, or may be performed automatically based on instructions from an external device.
  • the first imaging devices 430i to 430m attached to a position close to the plank 420 being transported may be a fiberscope camera. . If a fiberscope camera is used, for example, it is possible to take close-up pictures of the display area 201 formed by the stencil and the display area formed by the label 202 of the thick plate 420 being transported.
  • the captured image captured by the first imaging device is not limited to a still image, and may be a moving image.
  • the image extracted from the moving image captured by the first imaging device i.e., the image of the frame of the moving image
  • the fact that the captured image captured by the imaging device is not limited to a still image in this way also applies to the second to seventh imaging devices described later.
  • the thick plate transported from the steelworks is placed at a predetermined location on the gantry crane 410.
  • An area of the thick plate placed at a predetermined location of the gantry crane 410, including the stencil display area 201, is imaged by the first imaging devices 430c to 430f.
  • the operator operates the information processing terminal in the operation room of the gantry crane 410 or the information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.) held by the operator (worker) of the gantry crane 410 to operate the first imaging device.
  • a preview image display instruction is given to 430c to 430f.
  • the first imaging devices 430c to 430f transmit the preview image to the information processing terminal based on the preview image display instruction. Then, a preview image is displayed by the information processing terminal.
  • An operator operates the information processing terminal to issue an imaging instruction to a first imaging device that is imaging a preview image in which a display area of a stencil to be photographed is displayed.
  • the first imaging devices 430c to 430f capture an image of an area including the stencil display area 201.
  • the preview image is a live image displayed for confirmation by the operator (worker), and is displayed based on a preview image display instruction. It is assumed that the captured image is an image that is captured based on an imaging instruction while a preview image is being displayed. Further, although a case where a preview image is displayed is illustrated here, it is not always necessary to display the preview image.
  • the stencil display area 201 and the label 202 display area may not be included in the imaging range of the first imaging devices 430c to 430f.
  • an operator operates an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) 440a to 440b equipped with a first imaging device to display an area of a desired plank including the display area 201 by the stencil (or the display area by the label 202).
  • the first imaging device may be used to capture an image of the region (including the region).
  • an image of the area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of a desired thick plate may be captured using the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). good.
  • the first imaging device held by the operator may be, for example, an information terminal device (tablet terminal, smartphone, etc.) including the first imaging device.
  • the display of preview images and the capturing of captured images by the first imaging devices 430c to 430f described above are performed similarly in the first imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w other than the first imaging devices 430c to 430f. executed. Further, when a plurality of planks are stacked and conveyed at the same time, capturing an image of an area including the display area of the label 202 is performed by a first image capturing device other than the first image capturing devices 430c to 430f. 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w are similarly executed.
  • the imaging method is as follows: The same applies to the imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w. Therefore, detailed description of the first imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w other than the first imaging devices 430c to 430f will be omitted below.
  • planks After the planks are placed at a predetermined location on the gantry crane 410, they are loaded onto the transport ship 400 by the gantry crane 410. A plurality of planks may be stacked and loaded onto the transport ship 400 at the same time. In some cases, the planks are loaded onto the transport ship 400 one by one. Furthermore, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks loaded onto the transport ship 400 may be different.
  • a captured image of the area including the stencil display area 201 of the thick plate being transported by the gantry crane 410 is captured by first imaging devices 430g to 430m attached to the cargo handling device 411.
  • a captured image of the area of the plank including the stencil display area 201 is captured by the first imaging devices 430a to 430b attached to the gutter 412 or the transport ship 400.
  • the image is captured by a first imaging device 430n attached to the.
  • the first imaging device 430n attached to the transport ship 400 also adjusts the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. It is now possible to do so. Note that in FIG. 4, for convenience of notation, the number of first imaging devices attached to the transport ship 400 is one. However, a plurality of first imaging devices are attached to the transport ship 400 so that the area where the plank is placed is included in the imaging range.
  • the transport ship 400 loaded with thick plates as described above docks at a quay near the factory.
  • the planks are unloaded from the transport ship 400.
  • the gantry crane 410 is used to unload the thick plates. Images of the thick plates being transported by the gantry crane 410 are also captured in the same manner as when loading the plates onto the transport ship 400. Further, when the plate is unloaded by the Gundry crane 410 and placed at a predetermined location of the Gundry crane 410, the plate is also treated in the same manner as when it is transported from a steelworks and placed at a predetermined location of the Gantry crane 410. A captured image is captured.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport vehicle.
  • the planks placed at a predetermined location of Gundry crane 410 are loaded onto transport vehicle 700 using a crane (not shown) or the like.
  • a plurality of planks may be stacked and loaded onto a transport vehicle 700 at the same time.
  • the planks may be loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 one by one.
  • at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 may be different.
  • the planks may be transported and loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which thick plates are loaded onto the transport vehicle 700.
  • First imaging devices 430o to 430p are attached to a structure installed at a standby position of transport vehicle 700.
  • the number and position of the first imaging devices 430o to 430p are such that as many display areas of the thick plates as possible can be imaged as the display area 201 of the thick plates loaded on the transportation vehicle 700 by the stencils and the display area of the labels 202. is set so that Furthermore, a first imaging device 430q is also attached to the transport vehicle 700.
  • the first imaging devices 430o to 430q can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing.
  • An area of the thick plate loaded on the transport vehicle 700, including the stencil display area 201, is imaged by the first imaging devices 430o to 430q.
  • a transport device (gantry crane 410) used to transport the thick plate from the transport ship 400 to a predetermined storage location of the gantry crane 410, and a transport device used to transport the thick plate from the transport vehicle 700 to the storage location in the factory. (a crane, etc. not shown) is a different conveyance device. In this way, a plate transported to a certain storage site by a certain transport device is transported to another storage site, which cannot be transported by the certain transport device, by a transport device different from the certain transport device. There may be cases where The same is true when transporting thick plates between other storage areas, such as between storage areas within a factory.
  • FIGS. 9A to 9C are diagrams showing first to third examples of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory.
  • First imaging devices 430r to 430w are attached to a structure installed in a storage area in a factory. As shown in FIGS. 9A-9C, planks are placed in various locations in a factory. Therefore, the number and position of the first imaging devices 430r to 430w are determined so that as many display areas of the thick plates as possible are imaged as the display area 201 of the stencils and the display area of the labels 202 of the thick plates placed in the storage area. is set to The first imaging devices 430r to 430w can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing.
  • imaging conditions imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.
  • the first imaging devices 430r to 430w image an area of a thick plate placed in a warehouse in a factory, including the stencil display area 201.
  • the area of the plank including the stencil display area 201 is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w as described above. Ru.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of how a thick plate is processed in a production facility.
  • production equipment 1000 is, for example, equipment for heat treatment and equipment for gas cutting.
  • FIG. 10 a case where thick plates 1002a and 1002b are transported using a transport roll 1001 is illustrated. Note that conveyance of the thick plate between the storage area and the conveyance roll 1001 is realized by using a conveyance device (not shown) or the like.
  • First imaging devices 430x to 430y are attached to a structure installed on a production line of a factory.
  • the number and position of the first imaging devices 430x to 430y are set so that the display area 201 formed by the stencil of the thick plates 1002a, 1002b is imaged.
  • the first imaging devices 430x to 430y can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing.
  • the thick plates 1002a and 1002b transported on the transport roll 1001 are not overlapped.
  • the conveyance path of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b on the conveyance roll 1001 is assumed in advance.
  • the first imaging devices 430x to 430y do not fail to capture images of the display areas of the labels 202 of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b.
  • the display area of the labels 202 of the planks 1002a and 1002b may be imaged using an unmanned aerial vehicle equipped with a first imaging device.
  • the broken line shows the conveyance route of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b on the conveyance roll 1001, and does not actually exist.
  • a thick plate 1002a transported from a storage area in a factory is placed on a transport roll 1001 and transported by the transport roll 1001.
  • a region of the thick plate 1002a being transported on the transport rolls 1001 before entering the production facility 1000, including the stencil display region 201, is imaged by the first imaging device 430x.
  • an area of the thick plate 1002b being transported on the transport rolls 1001, including the display area 201 by the stencil is imaged by the first imaging device 430y. be done.
  • planks are placed in a warehouse as illustrated in FIGS. 9A to 9C.
  • the area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of a thick plate placed in a storage area in a factory is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w.
  • planks are moved from a warehouse to a shipping area.
  • An area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of the thick plate placed in the shipping area is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w.
  • each storage area within the factory multiple planks may be stacked on top of each other.
  • one plate is placed in each storage area within the factory.
  • at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks placed in each storage area within the factory may be different.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the original thick plate and the thick plate after cutting.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a case where thick plate 1100 is cut to produce thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140.
  • markings are applied to each plank 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140.
  • display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, 1141 for planks 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140 are shown.
  • Information including the IDs of the planks 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140 is displayed in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141.
  • display is performed using, for example, a stencil.
  • a stencil In addition to the display using a stencil, at least one of a stamp and a label may be used. Furthermore, the display in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 may be handwritten.
  • the ID of the original thick plate 1100 may be displayed in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141.
  • display is performed using, for example, a stencil.
  • the display in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 may be handwritten. This also applies to the display on the display area 201 and the display on the label 202.
  • display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 are display areas using stencils.
  • the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 of the desired thick plates are displayed using a stencil using a first imaging device held by an operator (worker).
  • a captured image of the area including the area may be captured.
  • the first imaging device held by the operator (worker) may be, for example, an information terminal device (tablet terminal, smartphone, etc.) including the first imaging device.
  • the operator (worker) operates the unmanned aerial vehicle equipped with the first imaging device to capture the captured image of the region of the desired thick plate including the stencil display regions 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141.
  • the image may be captured by one imaging device.
  • the position of the plank is automatically specified by the article management device using the captured image captured as described above.
  • the display area 201 by the stencil can be imaged, so the captured image of the area including the display area by the label 202 becomes unnecessary.
  • stencil (label) display when stencil display and label 202 display are collectively referred to, they will be referred to as stencil (label) display as necessary.
  • the stencil display areas 201, 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 and the label 202 display area are collectively referred to as a stencil (label) display area, if necessary.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200.
  • the hardware of the article management device 1200 is realized by using, for example, an information processing device including a CPU, ROM, RAM, HDD, and various interfaces, or dedicated hardware.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a management table 1300 managed by the article management device 1200. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, tracking is performed by the article management device 1200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 becomes a tracking device.
  • the article management device 1200 includes a first image acquisition unit 1201, a recognition unit 1202, an acquisition unit 1203, a collation unit 1204, an identification unit 1205, and a position derivation unit 1206. , a storage unit 1207 , an output unit 1208 , and a second image acquisition unit 1209 .
  • the first image acquisition unit 1201 acquires a first captured image of an area including a display area by a stencil (label).
  • the recognition unit 1202 recognizes components, positions, etc. of display items in a stencil (label) display from the first captured image acquired by the first image acquisition unit 1201.
  • the acquisition unit 1203 acquires information stored in the ID column of the actual item display column in the management table 1300, which will be described later.
  • the collation unit 1204 collates the information recognized by the recognition unit 1202 and the information obtained by the acquisition unit 1203.
  • the identification unit 1205 identifies one plank from among the planks managed in the management table 1300 based on the result of the verification performed by the verification unit 1204 .
  • an identification information acquisition unit 1210 that acquires identification information of a thick plate includes a recognition unit 1202, an acquisition unit 1203, a collation unit 1204, and a specification unit 1205.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 derives the xyz coordinates (three-dimensional coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified by the specifying unit 1205.
  • the storage unit 1207 stores information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate in the management table 1300.
  • the output unit 1208 outputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate.
  • the second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires a second captured image for specifying the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) in the position derivation unit 1206.
  • a detailed example of the article management device 1200 will be described later with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.
  • a management table 1300 stores information used by the article management device 1200 to manage the position of the plank.
  • the information stored in the management table 1300 includes information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. However, some of the information stored in the management table 1300 may be information that can also be used in distribution and the like.
  • the information managed by the thick plate manufacturer is information set or acquired by the thick plate manufacturer.
  • the information managed by the thick plate manufacturer includes information that allows an operator who is an employee of the thick plate manufacturer to understand the meaning of the information. More specifically, the information managed by the thick plate manufacturer is, for example, information created by the thick plate manufacturer and stored in the management table 1300.
  • the information stored in the management table 1300 is an example of article management data, and by storing each piece of information in the management table 1300, an example of the data structure of article management data is realized. .
  • information in the same column becomes identification information for the same plank (columns under the same No. become columns in which identification information for the same plank is stored, respectively).
  • information regarding each display item of the stencil (label) display is stored in the actual item display column.
  • the non-actual item display column stores information other than information regarding each display item displayed by a stencil (label).
  • the information stored in the item display column is an example of display information included in article management data, and the information stored in the non-item item display column is hidden information included in article management data. This is an example.
  • the stencil column of the actual product display column information regarding the stencil is stored.
  • the ID column of the stencil column information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 305 included in the stencil display is stored.
  • component element refers to each piece of information that constitutes a display item, such as letters, numbers, symbols, and marks.
  • the customer name column of the stencil column information indicating the content and position of the constituent elements of the customer name 302 included in the stencil display is stored.
  • the size column of the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of size 304 included in the stencil display.
  • the standard column of the stencil column stores information indicating the contents and positions of the constituent elements of the standard 303 included in the stencil display.
  • the customer code column in the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of the customer code 306 included in the stencil display.
  • the order number column in the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of order number 307 included in the stencil display.
  • the contents of display items that may be displayed as display items in the stencil display are also stored in the management table 1300.
  • the "" below the additional information column in the stencil column in FIG. 13 indicates this.
  • display items themselves may be added and/or deleted.
  • information regarding the label is stored in the column of label.
  • information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 312 included in the label display is stored.
  • information indicating the content and position of the component of size 313 included in the label display is stored.
  • the standard column of the label column stores information indicating the contents and positions of the constituent elements of the standard 311 included in the label display.
  • information indicating the content and position of the component of the delivery date 314 included in the label display is stored.
  • the customer code column in the label column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of the customer code 315 included in the label display.
  • the contents of display items that may be displayed as display items in the label display are also stored in the management table 1300. "" below the customer code column in the label column of FIG. 13 indicates this. Furthermore, display items themselves may be added and/or deleted.
  • Information indicating the position of the display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored in the column of position within the article.
  • the stencil column of the intra-article position column information indicating the position of the stencil display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored.
  • the label column of the intra-article position column information indicating the position of the label display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored.
  • the article position column information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is stored.
  • the information stored in the item position column is information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank specified by the item management device 1200. Therefore, the three-dimensional position of the same plank identified by the article management device 1200 may change not only the x-coordinate and y-coordinate but also the z-coordinate as the plank moves. Therefore, as the plank moves, the three-dimensional position of the information display position of the same plank identified by the article management device 1200 changes not only in the x and y coordinates (position in the horizontal direction) but also in the z coordinate (height). direction position) may also change.
  • the registered time column stores information indicating the date and time when the plank was placed at the current position (timing determined from the date and time).
  • Information indicating the ID of the original plank is stored in the parent ID column.
  • Planks may be cut in a factory.
  • Original plank refers to the plank before cutting. Therefore, if information indicating the ID of the original plank is stored in the parent ID column, the information stored in the column in the same column as the parent ID column is the information for the plank after cutting. become.
  • thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140 are manufactured as shown in FIG. , 1131, and 1141 are stored. Furthermore, information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1100 is stored in the parent ID column for the thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140.
  • the information on the thick plate after cutting is exemplified as being managed as a new column (No) in the management table 1300 shown in FIG. 13.
  • information regarding the thick plate after cutting is stored in the actual item display and non-actual item display columns.
  • the plank 1110 may be cut to produce a plurality of additional planks.
  • information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1110 is stored in the parent ID column for the other plurality of thick plates.
  • the parent ID column for the thick plate 1110 information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1100 is stored.
  • the sequence of planks obtained by tracing the information stored in the parent ID column for a certain plank in this manner will be referred to as the cut plate series of the plank.
  • the cut plate series of plank 1110 becomes planks 1100 and 1110.
  • each plank for example, in order to know the cutting board series, not only information indicating the ID of the most recent plank but also the IDs of all planks belonging to that cutting series are shown. Information may also be stored. In this case, any ID defined by the manufacturer is used.
  • the ID of the thick plate carrier is stored in the column of carrier ID.
  • the carriers are a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700.
  • the article management device 1200 may store information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400, for example, as follows. First, the article management device 1200 acquires the ID of the plank and the ID (so-called ship number) of the transport ship 400. Then, the article management device 1200 identifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the article management device 1200 stores information indicating the acquired ID of the transport ship 400 in the vehicle ID column of the specified column.
  • the first imaging devices 430a, 430b, and 430n capture an image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. Good too.
  • the article management device 1200 may recognize and acquire the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400 from the captured image.
  • the first imaging devices 430a, 430b, and 430n capture a captured image including a display area 201 using a stencil or a display area using a label 202, and a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. may be imaged.
  • a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed may be captured next to the captured image including the display area 201 by the stencil or the display area by the label 202.
  • the article management device 1200 includes an ID recognized from a captured image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. The ID recognized from the captured image may be acquired as the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400.
  • the operator (worker) of the transport ship 400 may input the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.).
  • the goods management device 1200 can send the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400. You may also obtain the ID of
  • the article management device 1200 may store information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700, for example, as follows. First, the article management device 1200 acquires the ID of the plank and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 (for example, license plate information). Then, the article management device 1200 identifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the article management device 1200 stores information indicating the acquired ID of the transport vehicle 700 in the column of the vehicle ID of the specified column.
  • the article management device 1200 acquires the ID of the plank and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 (for example, license plate information). Then, the article management device 1200 identifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the article management device 1200 stores information indicating the acquired ID of the transport vehicle 700 in the column of the vehicle ID of the specified column.
  • the first imaging devices 430o to 430q may capture an image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed.
  • the article management device 1200 may recognize and acquire the ID of the thick plate and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 from the captured image.
  • the first imaging devices 430o to 430q capture a captured image including the stencil display area 201 or the label 202 display area, and a captured image including the area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed.
  • a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport vehicle 700 is displayed may be captured next to the captured image including the display area 201 by the stencil or the display area by the label 202.
  • the article management device 1200 includes an ID recognized from a captured image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed.
  • the ID recognized from the captured image may be acquired as the ID of the thick plate and the ID of the transport vehicle 700.
  • the operator (worker) of the transportation vehicle 700 may input the ID of the plank and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.).
  • a handheld information processing terminal tablet terminal, etc.
  • the article management device 1200 can send the ID of the plate and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700. You may also obtain the ID of
  • the data structure of the management table 1300 may be such that the information stored in each column of the management table 1300 (for example, article position and registration time) is updated every time a plank is placed in a new position. good. Further, the data structure of the management table 1300 may be a data structure to which information is added. In the latter case, there is an advantage that the history of the position of the article can be tracked.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display using the stencil.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a case in which stencil display is performed with the display position shown in FIG. 2 and the content shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the vertex 203 shown in FIG. among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate, the vertex 203 shown in FIG.
  • the position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item by the stencil are expressed in xy coordinates with the direction along the horizontal direction being the positive direction of the x-axis.
  • the xy coordinates of two vertices on the diagonal are defined as the position of the stencil in the article.
  • the xy coordinates (Ls10, Ws10) and (Ls11, Ws11) of the two vertices 1401a and 1401b of the circumscribed rectangle indicate the position of the stencil within the article.
  • the circumscribed rectangle is a rectangle parallel to the coordinate axes (x-axis and y-axis in the example shown in FIG. 14) expressing the position within the article.
  • the xy coordinates of the center of gravity (or centroid) of each component (letter, number, symbol, mark) of each display item in the stencil display is taken as the position of the component.
  • the y-axis coordinates of 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, and 1, which are the components of ID 305 included in the stencil display are Ws1, Ws2, Ws3, Ws4, and Ws5, respectively.
  • Ws6, Ws7, Ws8, and Ws9 indicating that the x-axis coordinates are all Ls1.
  • the position of each component of each display item displayed by the stencil is expressed by xy coordinates.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the label in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display by the label.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a case in which labels are displayed in the display position shown in FIG. 2 and the display content shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the vertex 204 shown in FIG. among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate, the vertex 204 shown in FIG.
  • the position of the label within the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item on the label are expressed in yz coordinates, with the direction along the thickness direction being the positive direction of the z-axis.
  • the label is rectangular.
  • the yz coordinates of two diagonal vertices are taken as the position of the label within the article.
  • the yz coordinates of the position of the center of gravity (or centroid) of the component of each display item in the label display is taken as the position of the component.
  • the yz coordinates of the two vertices 1501a and 1501b of the label indicate the position of the label within the article.
  • the ID column of the stencil column of the actual product display column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 305 included in the stencil display. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the example shown in FIG. 14, the ID column of the stencil column of the actual item display column contains "5", " 6'', ⁇ 3'', ⁇ 4'', ⁇ 9'', ⁇ 7'', ⁇ -'', ⁇ 0'', and ⁇ 1'' are stored.
  • the positions of the relevant components are (Ls1, Ws1), (Ls2, Ws1), (Ls3, Ws1), (Ls4, Ws1), (Ls5 , Ws1), (Ls6, Ws1), (Ls7, Ws1), (Ls8, Ws1), and (Ls9, Ws1) are stored.
  • information indicating the content and position of the component of the display item is stored in the other display item column of the actual item display column. Note that the information indicating the position of the component of each display item in the label column is not the xy coordinate but the yz coordinate.
  • the stencil column in the column for position within the article in the column for displaying non-actual items includes (Ls10, Ws10), as information indicating the position of the stencil within the article. (Ls11, Ws11) is stored.
  • information indicating the position of the label within the article is also stored in the label column of the intra-article position column. Note that, as described above, the information indicating the position of the label within the article is not the xy coordinate but the yz coordinate.
  • the operator may operate the user interface of the article management device 1200 to input information to be stored in each column of the management table 1300 into the article management device 1200. Additionally, the article management device 1200 may receive information to be stored in each column of the management table 1300 from an external device such as a computer that manages factory operations.
  • the information stored in the item display column of the management table 1300 and the information stored in the item position and parent ID column of the non-item item display column may be determined after the display on the thick plate is performed. For example, in some cases, the requirements are determined before the marking is applied to the plank. Therefore, if the information to be stored in the column is determined before displaying on the plank, the article management device 1200, for example, acquires the information to be stored in the column as described above. and stored in each column of the management table 1300.
  • the article management device 1200 acquires the information to be stored in the relevant column and stores it in each column of the management table 1300, for example, at the timing when the information to be stored in the relevant column is obtained.
  • the registration time column stores the date and time when the information stored in the article position column was changed. In this case, the date and time when the plank was placed at the current position is registered in the registration time column.
  • information is stored in the column for the item only if the information for the item has been acquired, and if the information for the item has not been acquired, the information for the item is stored in the column for the item. No information is stored in the field. Furthermore, if the information stored in the article position column is not updated even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the date and time stored in the registration time column, the article management device 1200 determines that the identification of the position of the plank has been interrupted. It is preferable to make a judgment and reset the information stored in the columns of the article position and registration time.
  • the article management device 1200 determines whether a plank whose date and time is later than the date and time written in the column of registered time to be reset is stored in the column of registered time, and which is stored in the column of article position to be reset. If there is a plank in the same three-dimensional position as the current position, it is desirable to issue a sign to confirm it with an alarm or the like.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment.
  • An example of the functions of the article management device 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, tracking is performed by the article management device 1200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the article management method implemented using the flowchart illustrated in FIG. 17 is a tracking method.
  • the first image acquisition unit 1201 acquires the first captured image.
  • the first captured image is captured by any one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430y, the first imaging devices included in the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, and the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). This is a captured image captured by the first imaging device.
  • the first captured image may be directly transmitted from the first imaging device to the article management device 1200, or may be transmitted from the first imaging device to the article management device 1200 via an information terminal device.
  • the 17 is performed on any one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430y, the first imaging devices included in the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, and the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). This process is executed every time the article management device 1200 receives a captured image captured by one imaging device. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the ID of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image and the imaging conditions under which the first captured image was captured are transmitted together with the first captured image. .
  • the first image acquisition unit 1201 includes the first captured image, the ID of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image, the imaging conditions under which the first captured image was captured, and the The imaging date and time of the first captured image are acquired.
  • the imaging conditions include information necessary for specifying the position of the stencil display area or the label display area, as will be described later.
  • the position information of the first imaging device when the first captured image is captured is Sent with the image.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c can position the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the unmanned aerial vehicle using GPS (Global Positioning System), the first The three-dimensional coordinates may be transmitted as the position information of the imaging device.
  • the first imaging devices 430g to 430m attached to the cargo handling device 411, and the first imaging device 430q attached to the transportation vehicle 700 Similarly to the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, the position information of the first imaging device may be transmitted together with the first captured image. This also applies to the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). Note that if the first imaging device is unable to capture an area that should be included in the first captured image, the imaging conditions of the first imaging device (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number, etc.) are adjusted.
  • step S1702 the recognition unit 1202 recognizes the constituent elements (letters, numbers, symbols, marks) of display items in the stencil (label) display from the first captured image acquired in step S1701.
  • the process of recognizing the contents of the constituent elements of the display items can be realized, for example, by a technique using well-known OCR (Optical Character Recognition), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.
  • OCR Optical Character Recognition
  • the process in step S1702 may be realized using a technology using AI (Artificial Intelligence) such as NN (Neural Network) or a technology that combines AI and OCR (so-called AI OCR).
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • NN Neurological Network
  • AI OCR a technology that combines AI and OCR
  • the recognition unit 1202 identifies whether the component of the display item is displayed by a stencil or displayed by a label. For example, the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image acquired in step S1701, detects the edge of the thick plate, and identifies the area of the thick plate based on the detected result. Then, the recognition unit 1202 determines whether the identified region is a plate surface portion of the thick plate or a side surface (plate thickness) portion of the thick plate. This determination is realized, for example, based on the aspect ratio of the specified area. As a result of this determination, if the identified area is a plate surface portion of a thick plate, the recognition unit 1202 recognizes that the component of the display item is displayed by a stencil. On the other hand, if the identified area is the side surface (thickness) of a thick plate, the recognition unit 1202 recognizes that the component of the display item is displayed by a label.
  • the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image, and if the area of the rectangular label 202 is detected, the recognition unit 1202 determines that the component of the display item is displayed by the label. If this is not the case, the component of the displayed item may be recognized as being displayed using a stencil.
  • the first captured image includes a display area 201 using a stencil instead of a display area using a label 202. .
  • the recognition unit 1202 derives the position of the display item. An example of a method by which the first recognition unit 1202 derives the position of a display item will be described. First, the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image acquired in step S1701 to detect edges of the thick plate. Then, the recognition unit 1202 detects the origin of the position within the article (predetermined position on the thick plate) in the first captured image. For example, the recognition unit 1202 identifies the article in the captured image based on a preset positional relationship between the display area of the stencil (label) and the origin of the position within the article among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate. Derive the vertex that is the origin of the internal position (predetermined position on the thick plate).
  • the following information may be preset in the article management device 1200 as the positional relationship between the display area of the stencil (label) and the origin of the position within the article.
  • the stencil (label) display is on the same surface as the stencil (label) display.
  • Information that the vertex located on the lower right side of is the origin of the position within the article may be set in advance in the article management device 1200.
  • the recognition unit 1202 derives the position of the component of the display item in the stencil (label) display based on the origin of the position within the article in the captured image.
  • step S1703 the acquisition unit 1203 acquires information stored in the ID column of the actual item display column in the management table 1300 stored in the storage unit 1207.
  • step S1704 the matching unit 1204 matches the information recognized in step S1702 and the information obtained in step S1703. If the information recognized in step S1702 is recognized as stencil display information, the collation unit 1204 selects the ID column of the stencil column of the actual product display column of the information obtained in step S1703. The stored information is compared with the information recognized in step S1702. On the other hand, if the information recognized in step S1702 is recognized as label display information, the collation unit 1204 checks the ID in the label column of the actual product display column among the information obtained in step S1703. The information stored in the column is compared with the information recognized in step S1702.
  • step S1705 the identification unit 1205 identifies one plank from the planks managed in the management table 1300, based on the result of the verification in step S1703. Specifically, the identifying unit 1205 identifies information that matches the information recognized in step S1702 from among the information obtained in step S1703.
  • matching means that the information recognized in step S1702 completely matches the content and arrangement order of the components stored in the stencil column of the actual item display column or the ID column of the label column. It means that there is a part that is In the example shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the contents of the components of IDs 305 and 312 displayed by the stencil or label are 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, 1, and the arrangement order is , from left to right: 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, 1. Therefore, the identifying unit 1205 identifies information in which 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, and 1 are arranged in this order from the left from the ID column managed in the management table 1300. .
  • the information recognized in step S1702 not only when some of these constituent elements are missing, but also when constituent elements other than these constituent elements are lined up, the information recognized in step S1702 is It is assumed that the information does not completely match the content and arrangement order of the components stored in the stencil column of the actual item display column or the ID column of the label column.
  • step S1706 the position deriving unit 1206 determines whether the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image obtained in step S1701 is known, based on the information obtained in step S1701. Determine whether In this embodiment, the first imaging devices 430a to 430f are attached to the gutter 412 and the leg structure 413, and the first imaging device 430o is attached to the structure installed at the standby position of the transport vehicle 700. -430p, first imaging devices 430r to 430w attached to structures installed in a storage area in the factory, and first imaging devices attached to structures installed on the production line of the factory It is assumed that the three-dimensional positions 430x to 430y are known.
  • the ID of the first imaging device and the position information (three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates)) of the first imaging device are correlated with each other. It is assumed that it has been registered in the article management device 1200 in advance. If the position information (three-dimensional coordinates) associated with the same ID as the ID of the first imaging device acquired in step S1701 is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance, the position derivation unit 1206 determines the position information in step S1701. It is determined that the position of the first imaging device that captured the acquired first captured image is known, and if not, the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 is determined to be known. Determine that it is not known.
  • step S1707 the position derivation unit 1206 determines whether the position information of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image has been acquired in step S1701. As a result of this determination, if the position information of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image has not been acquired in step S1701, the process advances to step S1712, which will be described later.
  • step S1706 determines whether the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified. Note that a specific example in which the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area using a stencil (label) can be specified will be described later. As a result of the determination in step S1708, if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) cannot be specified, the process proceeds to step S1712, which will be described later.
  • step S1709 the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified in step S1705.
  • step S1710 the storage unit 1207 converts the information stored in the item position column of the non-in-stock item display column of the management table 1300 as information for the thick plate identified in step S1705 into the information derived in step S1709.
  • the information is updated to indicate the three-dimensional position of the plank.
  • this embodiment exemplifies a case where the information stored in the article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table 1300 is the information display position.
  • the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate derived in step S1709 is an example of the information display position newly derived by the position deriving means.
  • the information stored in the article position column of the non-in-stock item display column of the management table 1300 before the process of step S1710 is performed is an example of the information display position already stored in the storage medium.
  • the information stored in the item position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table 1300 is the xyz coordinates of the display area by the stencil (label). Therefore, the information display position is a three-dimensional position.
  • the information display position of the same thick plate changes not only the x-coordinate and y-coordinate but also the z-coordinate (position in the height direction) as the position of the thick plate changes.
  • the process of step S1710 makes it possible to track the position of the plank whose existing position changes.
  • step S1711 the output unit 1208 outputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate identified in step S1705.
  • the output unit 1208 causes the computer display to display information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank identified in step S1705. Then, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 17 ends.
  • the stencil display area 201 is a region of the plate surface of the plate near the center in the width direction (y-axis direction) of the plate and in the longitudinal direction of the plate. It is located in a region on one end side (negative direction side of the x-axis).
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 by the stencil is an example of the information display position.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 using a stencil.
  • point P indicates the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device (the xyz coordinates of point P are (x p , y p , z p )).
  • the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device is, for example, the principal point of the first imaging device.
  • the z-axis is perpendicular to the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 formed by the stencil is formed).
  • the y-axis is parallel to the direction in which constituent elements of the same display item are lined up in the stencil display area 201.
  • the x-axis is parallel to the direction in which different display items are lined up in the display area 201 using the stencil.
  • the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are perpendicular to each other. Furthermore, here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the width direction of the thick plate is parallel to the y-axis, and the length direction of the thick plate is parallel to the x-axis.
  • Point S indicates the position of the vertex that is located on the negative side of the x-axis and on the positive side of the y-axis among the four vertices of the display area 201 formed by the stencil (the x- The yz coordinates are (x s , y s , z s )).
  • Point O is the foot of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) (the intersection of the perpendicular to point P and the xy plane). In the example shown in FIG. 18, point O is assumed to be the origin.
  • Point Q is the intersection of a straight line passing through point O and parallel to the x-axis and a straight line passing through point S and parallel to the y-axis.
  • the xyz coordinate S (x s , y s , z s ) of the point S is expressed by the following equation (4).
  • S(x s , y s , z s ) (L, w y , 0) (4)
  • the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the xyz coordinates (x s , y s , z s ) are derived as the position of the display area 201 using a stencil.
  • the length H of the line segment OP is the value obtained by subtracting the z-coordinate zs of the display area 201 by the stencil from the z-coordinate zp of the point P. Therefore, if the z-coordinate of the stencil display area 201 (the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the stencil display area 201) is specified, the length H of the line segment OP can be derived. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a case where the z-coordinate zs of the stencil display area 201 is 0 (zero), so the length H of the line segment OP is equal to the z-coordinate zp of the point P.
  • the position of point S in the first captured image is derived, for example, as follows.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 determines the position of the maximum value of the x-axis, the minimum value of the x-axis, the maximum value of the y-axis, and the minimum value of the y-axis among the components of the display item by the stencil recognized in step S1702. Derive the fixed circumscribed rectangle. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 determines, among the vertices of the derived circumscribed rectangle, the lower left side (the negative side of the x-axis and the The position of the vertex located in the positive direction of the y-axis is derived as the position of the point S in the first captured image.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position deriving unit 1206 so that, among the vertices of the rectangular label, the top of the constituent element of the stencil display item is located on the upper side.
  • the vertex located on the lower left side is derived as the position of point S in the first captured image.
  • the position of point Q in the first captured image is a position on a straight line that passes through the position of point S in the first captured image and is parallel to the y-axis, and The position corresponds to the center of the corner).
  • the point Q may be specified, for example, as follows. That is, a display area 201 is formed by stenciling a straight line passing through the position of point S and parallel to the y-axis by irradiating a laser beam from point P with a laser pointer or the like on the plate surface of the thick plate. display on the screen.
  • a laser beam is irradiated from point P using a laser pointer or the like, and a straight line passing through point O and parallel to the x-axis is drawn on the surface of the thick plate where the display area 201 by the stencil is formed. indicate.
  • a distance measurement sensor for example, a TOF (Time-of-Flight) distance measurement sensor
  • the positions of the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 are also derived in the same manner as the method described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, since the display area 201 using the stencil and the display area using the label 202 differ only in the surface on which they are arranged on the thick plate, the position of the display area using the label 202 is also determined by the method described with reference to FIG. It can be derived according to the following. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 first derives the distance in the height direction (z-axis direction) from the first imaging device to the stencil display area using a laser range finder. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position obtained by subtracting the distance from the position of the first imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction) as the position of the display area 201 by the stencil in the height direction (z-axis direction). Derive it as
  • the position deriving unit 1206 extracts the information indicating the position of the thick plate stored in the article position column of the management table 1300 and the thickness information stored in the registration time column of the management table 1300. Using information indicating the date and time when the board was placed at the current position, the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) is derived. An example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by a stencil (label) in this manner will be described. Note that here, the three-dimensional position of the thick plate stored in the article position column of the management table 1300 is referred to as an article position, as necessary. In addition, here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the lowest plank among a plurality of stacked planks is placed on the ground.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the imaging range (xy coordinates) of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 from a plank other than the plank identified in step S1705.
  • a plank plate that includes at least a portion of the board is identified based on the article position stored in the management table 1300.
  • step S1705 the position deriving unit 1206 determines that the thick plate, at least a part of which is included in the imaging range (xy coordinates) of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701, is Determine that it is under the identified plank.
  • all the sizes (thicknesses) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the planks below the plank identified in step S1705 are added to the thickness of the plank specified in step S1705.
  • the value is the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 by the stencil.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 uses the thickness specified in step S1705 among the thick plates specified as described above.
  • a plank whose date and time is later than the date and time stored in the registration time column of the management table 1300 as plank information is a plank below the plank identified in step S1705. It is determined that In this case, all the added values of the size (thickness) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the plank below the plank specified in step S1705, and the information on the plank specified in step S1705.
  • the value obtained by adding the value of the z-coordinate of the position within the article stored in the management table 1300 becomes the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area of the label 202.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 when information that allows the height direction (z-axis direction) to be specified is displayed in the first captured image, the position derivation unit 1206 generates a stencil (label) based on the information. ) can derive the position of the display area in the height direction (z-axis direction).
  • a stencil label
  • An example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by a stencil (label) in this manner will be described. For example, if the first captured image includes a structure on which a scale indicating the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) is displayed, the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the scale of the structure from the first captured image. Recognize.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 performs edge detection processing on the first captured image to extract edges of the object, and extracts the structure from the extracted object. For example, information in which information indicating the outline of an object and the name of the object are mutually associated is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance. In this case, the position deriving unit 1206 may extract the object corresponding to the structure by comparing the edge of the object extracted as described above with the information. Further, the position derivation unit 1206 may extract the structure from the objects extracted as described above using AI (Artificial Intelligence) such as NN (Neural Network).
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • NN Neurological Network
  • the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the stencil (label) based on the position of the display area of the stencil (label) in the first captured image and the position of the scale displayed on the structure in the first captured image. ) is derived from the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area. Note that the numbers attached to the scale in the first captured image are recognized using a method similar to the method for recognizing the constituent elements of display items using stencils (labels).
  • the position derivation unit 1206 uses the second captured image acquired by the second image acquisition unit 1209 to derive the position of the display area 201 by the stencil in the height direction (z-axis direction). You may.
  • a step is added in which the second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires the second captured image before the processing in step S1708 is started.
  • the second captured image was captured by a second imaging device that is different from the first imaging device that captured the first captured image (an imaging device that captures an area including a stencil (label) display area). This is a captured image.
  • the second captured image includes both the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 and the thick plate identified in step S1705.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 using a stencil.
  • point P indicates the position of the first imaging device (xyz coordinates of point P are (x p , y p , z p ) ).
  • the z-axis is a direction perpendicular to the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 by the stencil is formed).
  • the y-axis is a direction parallel to the direction in which constituent elements of the same display item are lined up in the stencil display area 201.
  • the x-axis is a direction parallel to the direction in which different display items are lined up in the stencil display area 201. Further, it is assumed that the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are perpendicular to each other. Again, to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the width direction of the plank is parallel to the y-axis, and the length direction of the plank is parallel to the x-axis.
  • point O' is the intersection of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) and the plane that includes the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 by the stencil is formed) (point O' corresponds to point O in FIG. 18).
  • Point O is the foot of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) (the intersection of the perpendicular to point P and the xy plane). In the example shown in FIG. 19, point O is assumed to be the origin.
  • Point R indicates the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device (the xyz coordinates of point R are (x r , y r , z r )).
  • the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device is, for example, the position of the principal point of the second imaging device.
  • the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device can be specified by the article management device 1200.
  • the ID of the second imaging device and the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the second imaging device are associated with each other. and registered in the article management device 1200 in advance.
  • the second imaging device can use the three-dimensional coordinates (x-y-z coordinates) of the second imaging device that are positioned using GPS. and the ID of the second imaging device. In this case, the second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires this information transmitted from the second imaging device.
  • Point D is the vertex closest to point R among the vertices of the surface on which the stencil display area 201 is formed.
  • Point B is the vertex closest to point R among the vertices of the bottom surface of the lowest plank among the plurality of stacked planks.
  • the direction in which the line segment RP extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point P in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image.
  • the direction in which the line segment RB extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point B in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image.
  • the direction in which the line segment RT extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point D in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the position of the second imaging device (point R) in the height direction (z-axis direction) is 0 (zero). Furthermore, if the second captured image is used as described above, the position deriving unit 1206 can calculate not only the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 by the stencil, but also the position in the height direction of the first imaging device. The position (z p ) (in the z-axis direction) can be derived.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 derives not only the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) but also the position in the x-axis direction (x p ) and the position in the y-axis direction (y p ) of the first imaging device. be able to.
  • x p and y p are derived based on the direction in which the line segment RP extends and y r +length of the line segment RP ⁇ cos ⁇ P. That is, a vector connecting points R and P is derived based on the direction in which line segment RP extends and y r +length of line segment RP x cos ⁇ P.
  • the length of the x-axis component and the length of the y-axis component of the vector are x p and y p .
  • Derivation of angle, direction, and length is achieved using a method similar to that described with reference to FIG. 19. Furthermore, if the imaging range of the third imaging device includes point P (first imaging device) and does not include point R (second imaging device), for example, point R' (third imaging device) is included in the imaging range of the third imaging device. What is necessary is to further use a fourth captured image captured by a fourth imaging device whose imaging range includes the point R (the second imaging device) and the point R (the second imaging device).
  • the imaging range of the third imaging device includes point R (second imaging device) and does not include point P (first imaging device), for example, point R'( It is sufficient to further use a fifth captured image captured by a fifth imaging device whose imaging range includes the point P (the third imaging device) and the point P (the first imaging device).
  • the position deriving unit 1206 identifies the position of the point P (first imaging device) using a sixth captured image captured by a sixth imaging device whose imaging range includes the first imaging device. It's okay. In this case, it is assumed that the sixth imaging device is included in the imaging range of at least one of the second imaging device, the third imaging device, and the fourth imaging device. Further, a point indicating the position of the sixth imaging device is designated as P' (not shown). Further, it is assumed that one or both of the position of the point P indicating the position of the first imaging device and the position of the point P' indicating the position of the sixth imaging device are determined in advance.
  • the stencil The position of the display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction) can be derived.
  • the third to sixth captured images are acquired by, for example, the second image acquisition unit 1209.
  • third to sixth image acquisition units that individually acquire the third to sixth captured images may be used.
  • the step of acquiring the second captured image by the second image acquisition unit 1209 is executed at a timing before the timing at which the process of step S1708 is started.
  • a step of individually acquiring the third to sixth captured images is added at a timing different from the timing at which the third to sixth captured images are acquired. Note that if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified without acquiring the second captured image, etc., the second image acquisition unit 1209 becomes unnecessary.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 converts the height direction (z-axis direction) of the stencil display area 201 of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b placed on the transport table 1001 into the position of the transport table 1001. and the size (thickness) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the thick plates 1000a and 1002b.
  • the position of the transport table 1001 is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance.
  • step S1708 the position of the display area by the stencil (label) is determined. It is determined that the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) can be specified.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the three-dimensional position of the plank on the carrier.
  • the carriers are a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700. Therefore, in this embodiment, a case where the transport equipment is a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700 will be exemplified.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank on the transport ship 400. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 identifies a column in which information indicating the same ID as the acquired thick plate ID is stored from the ID column of the management table 1300.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 stores information indicating the acquired three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 in the article position column of the specified column.
  • the operator (worker) of the transport ship 400 may input the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.). .
  • the position derivation unit 1206 by transmitting the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 from the information processing terminal to the article management device 1200, the position derivation unit 1206
  • the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 may be acquired.
  • the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is, for example, the xyz coordinates of the display area by a stencil (label).
  • the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport vehicle 700. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 specifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 stores information indicating the obtained three-dimensional position of the thick plate in the transportation vehicle 700 in the article position column of the specified column. For example, the operator (worker) of the transport vehicle 700 may input the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport vehicle 700 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.).
  • the position deriving unit 1206 can: The ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transportation vehicle 700 may be acquired.
  • the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is, for example, the xyz coordinates of the display area by a stencil (label).
  • the position of the display area of the stencil (label) in the height direction (z-axis direction) may be derived.
  • the sixth example will be explained using FIG. 20A and FIG. An example will be explained.
  • information on the number of pixels of the sensor of the first imaging device, information on the size of the sensor, and focal length for each optical magnification used at the time of photographing are stored in advance in the article management device 1200.
  • the focal length is information determined at the time of imaging.
  • FIG. 20A is a diagram showing an example of a first captured image including a display area 201 formed by a stencil.
  • the display area 201 formed by the stencil When the display area 201 formed by the stencil is imaged from the front, it becomes a rectangle in the first captured image.
  • the display area 201 formed by the stencil when the display area 201 formed by the stencil is imaged from an oblique direction, it may become a scalene quadrilateral in the first captured image, as shown by the broken line (virtual line) in FIG. 20A.
  • FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of the geometrical relationship between the inside of the first imaging device and the display area 201 formed by the stencil. In FIG.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 first specifies the positions of the four corner vertices 002a to 2002d of the stencil display area 201' imaged by the image sensor 2002.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 specifies straight lines 2003a to 2003d, which are the straight lines connecting the four corner vertices 2002a to 2002d of the stencil display area 201' and the principal point FP, and are extended toward the stencil display area 201 side.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 calculates that the principal point FP is the vertex of the head, the straight lines 2003a to 2003d are the four sides with the principal point FP as one end, and the bottom dimension is the display area 201 (rectangular) formed by the stencil.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional positional relationship between the stencil display area 201 and the principal point FP (first imaging device) based on the square pyramid 2001 identified in this manner.
  • the shape of the display area by the stencil is a rectangle whose dimensions are known in advance.
  • the shape of the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is not limited to a rectangle.
  • the stencil display area 201 shown in FIG. 20B is replaced with the display area of the display, the position and main A three-dimensional positional relationship with the point (first imaging device) can be derived.
  • the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is a plane.
  • the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is not limited to a plane. If the shape of the surface of the display area is known, the three-dimensional positional relationship between the display area and the first imaging device can be derived. For example, when the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional positional relationship between the display area of the display made on the surface of the cylindrical article and the first imaging device, this will be explained with reference to FIG. 20B.
  • the shape and dimensions of the display area and the curvature of the display surface of the display area may be stored in advance in the article management device 1200. This is because, based on this information, it is possible to specify what corresponds to the bottom surface of the square pyramid in the method of the sixth example described with reference to FIG. 20B.
  • step S1712 if it is determined in step S1708 that the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) cannot be specified, the process in step S1712 is executed. Ru.
  • the output unit 1208 outputs information indicating that the three-dimensional position of the plank cannot be specified and the ID of the first imaging device that imaged the plank.
  • the output unit 1208 causes the computer display to display information indicating that the three-dimensional position of the plank cannot be specified and the ID of the first imaging device that captured the image of the plank.
  • the operator goes to the location where the corresponding first imaging device is located and specifies the three-dimensional position of the corresponding plank. Further, the operator (worker) may specify the three-dimensional position of the corresponding thick plate from the preview image of the corresponding first imaging device.
  • step S1713 the storage unit 1207 inputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified by the operator (worker), and stores it in the non-product display column of the management table 1300 as information for the thick plate.
  • the information stored in the item position column is updated to the input information.
  • the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank can be input in the following ways: input by operating the user interface of the article management device 1200, receiving information transmitted from an external device, and information stored in a portable storage medium. At least one of these readings can be adopted. Then, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 17 ends.
  • the article management device 1200 is configured to display a display area in which information displayed on a thick plate and managed by the manufacturer of the thick plate is displayed using a stencil (label). A first captured image of the area including the area is acquired. The article management device 1200 determines the three-dimensional position of the display area of the stencil (label) based on the acquired first captured image and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image. Information indicating the three-dimensional position is stored in a storage medium in association with the ID of the plank.
  • the position of the planks can be managed even when the planks are placed in an empty storage area or when the planks are stacked. Therefore, the position of the thick plate can be appropriately managed.
  • the article management device 1200 uses the stencil (label) when the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) and the ID of the thick plate are already stored in the storage medium in association with each other.
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area based on the (label) is newly derived, the three-dimensional position of the display area based on the stencil (label) already stored in the storage medium is updated to the newly derived three-dimensional position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the tracking accuracy of the position of the plank whose position (location) changes with the passage of time.
  • the article management device 1200 recognizes the information (ID305, 312) displayed in the stencil (label) display area based on the first captured image.
  • the article management device 1200 then collates the recognized information with the information (ID) stored in the management table 1300, and identifies the thick plate based on the collation result. Therefore, the plank itself whose position is to be managed can be reliably specified based on the first captured image. Therefore, for example, the position of the thick plate can be specified with high precision compared to the case where the three-dimensional position of the thick plate is specified based on the operation of the transport device.
  • the article management device 1200 acquires a second captured image captured by a second imaging device different from the first imaging device that captured the first captured image.
  • the second captured image includes the first captured image and the plank (whose position is to be managed).
  • the article management device 1200 derives the position of the stencil display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction) based on the acquired second captured image and the position of the second imaging device.
  • the article management device 1200 then stores the position of the stencil display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction), the first captured image, and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image.
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 by the stencil is derived as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate. Therefore, even if the position of the thick plate in the height direction cannot be derived even if the first captured image or the sensor included in the first captured image is used, the position of the thick plate can be managed.
  • the stencil display and the label display are information that can be identified by humans. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator (worker) to manage the actual product. Therefore, the convenience of managing the actual item is improved.
  • the stencil display and the label display include information that is individually determined for each thick plate (information unique to the thick plate). Therefore, the plank can be uniquely identified based on the first captured image. Therefore, thick plates can be easily and quickly identified.
  • the article management device 1200 derives three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) as the position of the display area by the stencil (label). Therefore, for example, even if a plurality of planks are stacked on top of each other, the positions of the planks can be managed.
  • the method for deriving the position of the display area based on the stencil (label) included in the first captured image in step S1709 is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG. 18.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 derives the position of the origin when determining the position within the article in the management table 1300 from the first captured image. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 displays the stencil (label) included in the first captured image based on the derived origin position and the information stored in the column of the position within the article of the management table 1300. Derive the location of the region.
  • An example of a method for deriving the position of the stencil (label) display area included in the first captured image in this manner will be described using the stencil display area 201 as an example.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position of the display area 201 using a stencil. Similar to FIG. 18, FIG. 21 exemplifies a case where the xyz coordinates S (x s , y s , z s ) of the point S are derived as the position of the display area 201 by the stencil. As explained with reference to FIG. 14, the position of the stencil in the article is determined from the vertex 203 shown in FIG. It is expressed in xy coordinates with the direction along the length of the plate being the positive direction of the x-axis. Therefore, the position of point E in FIG. 21 is the origin of the position of the stencil within the article.
  • Point F is a point among the vertices of the thick plate that is lined up in the width direction (y-axis direction) with respect to point E (point E and point F form one side along the width direction of the thick plate).
  • Point T is the foot of the perpendicular line of point P to line segment EF (the intersection of the perpendicular line of point P and line segment EF).
  • Point P and point O are the same as shown in FIG.
  • the length of the line segment PT is h p .
  • the length of line segment PF is h 1
  • ⁇ FPT is ⁇ 1 (rad)
  • the length of line segment PE is h 2
  • ⁇ EPT is ⁇ 2 (rad)
  • the length of the line segment FT be w 01 and the length of the line segment ET be w 02 .
  • the length l p of the line segment OT is expressed by the following equation (5).
  • the length w o2 of the line segment ET is expressed by the following equation (6).
  • the length H of the line segment OP is derived as described with reference to FIG. 18.
  • the position of point T in the first captured image is a position on the line segment EF in the first captured image, and corresponds to the center of the horizontal angle of view (angle of view in the y-axis direction) at the time of imaging. .
  • the direction in which the line segment PE extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point E in the first captured image and the principal point of the first captured image.
  • the direction in which the line segment PT extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point T in the first captured image and the principal point of the first captured image.
  • the length h2 of the line segment PE is derived, for example, using a distance measurement sensor (for example, a TOF (Time-of-Flight) distance measurement sensor) included in the first imaging device.
  • the length h2 of the line segment PE may be derived based on the length H of the line segment OP and ⁇ OPE.
  • the stencil (label) display area For example, depending on at least one of the location where the plank is placed, the position of the stencil (label) display area, and the direction in which the plank is placed, the stencil (label) display area and the first There are cases where the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the imaging device and the expression described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 21 is not satisfied. For example, if a plurality of planks are stacked on a freight car and some of the plurality of planks cannot be imaged by the imaging device, the topmost of the plurality of planks is placed on top of the plurality of planks. The height position of the plank may not be determined.
  • the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the display area formed by the stencil (label) and the first imaging device may become complicated. Therefore, for example, the first imaging device may capture the luminance image and the distance image as the first captured images.
  • the brightness image is the captured image described so far in this embodiment.
  • the brightness image has information on the intensity of reflected light from the subject (brightness of the subject), but does not have information on the distance from the imaging device to the subject.
  • the distance image has information on the distance from the imaging device to the subject.
  • the first imaging device images the brightness image and the distance image so that the positions of the pixels of the brightness image and the positions of the pixels of the distance image correspond to each other.
  • a known method such as a TOF (Time Of Flight) method or a pattern irradiation method may be used as a known method such as a TOF (Time Of Flight) method or a pattern irradiation method may be used.
  • TOF Time Of Flight
  • the position derivation unit 1206 identifies pixels corresponding to the display area of the stencil (label) based on the luminance image. For example, the position derivation unit 1206 stores an image of a stencil (label) in advance as a template image. The position derivation unit 1206 specifies a display area for a stencil (label) from the brightness image by performing pattern matching between the brightness image and the template image. The position derivation unit 1206 specifies an area of the range image that corresponds to the display area of the stencil (label) specified from the brightness image. The position derivation unit 1206 extracts pixel values of the specified area from the distance image. The pixel value of the distance image is a value indicating the distance from the first imaging device to the subject.
  • the pixel value extracted from the distance image in this manner indicates the distance from the first imaging device to the display area defined by the stencil (label).
  • the position deriving unit 1206 can obtain the distance from the first imaging device to the predetermined position of the display area defined by the stencil (label) based on the pixel values extracted from the distance image.
  • the position deriving unit 206 calculates the three-dimensional position (x-y-z coordinates) of the first imaging device, the attitude of the first imaging device when capturing the first captured image, and the information from the first imaging device.
  • the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the predetermined position in the display area by the stencil (label) is derived based on the distance to the predetermined position in the display area by the stencil (label).
  • a person identifies the customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, order number 307, standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315. It is preferable if the information is available because it makes it easier for the operator (worker) to manage the actual product. However, at least one of the customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, order number 307, standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315 may be changed to a bar code or It may also be information that is converted (encoded) into information that cannot be identified by humans, such as a dimensional code.
  • ⁇ Third modification example>> In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, a case has been exemplified in which the ID 305 displayed by the stencil and the ID 312 displayed by the label are the same. However, the expressions and written contents of these IDs may differ. For example, some formats do not have a "hyphen" in the ID. In such a case, information indicating that these IDs (stencil ID, label ID) are for the same thick plate is stored in the management table 1300. Regarding display items other than IDs, the expression and written content of the same display item may be different depending on whether it is displayed using a stencil or displayed using a label.
  • the abbreviation of the standard may be displayed on the label, for example.
  • the number of digits of the customer code may differ depending on whether it is displayed using a stencil or a label, the customer code is managed by the manufacturer. Also, regarding sizes, not all digits of dimensions may be shown. Even in such a case, information indicating that the different expressions and written contents have the same meaning is stored in the management table 1300.
  • the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) is derived as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate.
  • the three-dimensional position of the plank is not limited to the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label).
  • the article management device 1200 recognizes only one element displayed on the surface of a plank, and converts the xyz coordinates of the position (for example, the center of gravity or centroid) of the recognized element into the three-dimensional coordinates of the plank. It may also be the original position.
  • An element is information that is treated as a single piece of information, such as letters, numbers, symbols, and marks.
  • an element is information that is recognized as one piece of information by the recognition unit 1202.
  • the article management device 1200 may recognize one element among the components of a display item in a stencil (label) display. Furthermore, the article management device 1200 may recognize one element other than the constituent elements of the display items in the stencil (label) display.
  • the article management device 1200 derives the three-dimensional position of one element as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate in this way, for example, the recognized circumscribed rectangle of one element is regarded as the display area 201 by the stencil, and the present embodiment Perform the processing described in .
  • the article management device 1200 may recognize only two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank.
  • the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank are, for example, two or more of the components of the display item in a stencil (label) display.
  • the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank are not all of the components of the display item in the stencil (label) display.
  • the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank may be elements different from the constituent elements of the displayed items in the stencil (label) display.
  • the article management device 1200 calculates the circumscribed rectangle of the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank.
  • the processing described in this embodiment is performed by regarding the display area 201 as a stencil display area.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 may derive the three-dimensional position of the article based on the position and size of the information displayed in the first captured image.
  • the article management device 1200 may include a direction derivation section.
  • the direction derivation unit derives information specifying the direction in which the article is placed based on a plurality of three-dimensional positions (xyz) on one surface of the article.
  • the direction derivation unit derives the angle between the plate surface of the thick plate and the reference plane based on the three-dimensional positions (xyz coordinates) of the two vertices 1401a and 1401b of the circumscribed rectangle shown in FIG. do.
  • the reference plane is, for example, the ground.
  • the reference surface may be a surface other than the ground.
  • the angle between the plate surface of the thick plate and the reference plane is an example of information that specifies the direction in which the article is placed.
  • the information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is not limited to the angle between the plate surface of the article and the reference plane.
  • the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the article may be used instead of the plate surface of the article.
  • the direction deriving unit calculates the three-dimensional position (x -yz coordinates) may also be used.
  • a column storing information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is added to the non-product display column of the management table 1300 shown in FIG. 13.
  • the column in which information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is stored will be referred to as the article direction column.
  • the storage unit 1207 stores information specifying the direction in which the thick plate is placed in the article direction column corresponding to the thick plate in the management table 1300. As a result, information specifying the direction in which the plank is placed, and the ID, three-dimensional position, etc. of the plank are stored in association with each other.
  • the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the position (point) to be derived from the three-dimensional position (x-y-z coordinates) is, for example, , is derived as follows.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 uses a laser range finder to calculate the height direction (z-axis direction) from the first imaging device to the information (point) from which the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) is to be derived. Derive the distance.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position obtained by subtracting the distance from the position of the first imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction) as information for deriving the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates). It is derived as the position of (point) in the height direction (z-axis direction).
  • the position derivation unit 1206 obtains information (point ) may be derived.
  • the xyz coordinates of the display area by the stencil (label) are derived as the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label).
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) is not limited to xyz coordinates.
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) may be a relative three-dimensional position with respect to the position of the first imaging device. In this case, it is not necessary to use the coordinates (x p , y p , z p ) of the point P indicating the three-dimensional position of the imaging device.
  • the origin of the xyz coordinates is the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device
  • the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) may be expressed as the xyz coordinates. This indicates a relative three-dimensional position based on the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 includes the recognition unit 1202, the acquisition unit 1203, the collation unit 1204, and the identification unit 1205 is illustrated.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the recognition unit 1202.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the acquisition unit 1203, for example.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the recognition unit 1202 and the acquisition unit 1203, for example.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may acquire the ID recognized by the recognition unit 1202 as the identification information of the thick plate. In this case, the identification information acquisition section 1210 does not need to include the acquisition section 1203, the collation section 1204, and the identification section 1205. Further, for example, if the number of articles whose positions are to be managed is limited to one in advance, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may acquire the ID acquired by the acquisition unit 1203 as the identification information of the thick plate. . In this case, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 does not need to include the recognition unit 1202, the verification unit 1204, and the identification unit 1205.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 uses the recognition unit 1202, and limits the number of articles whose positions are to be managed to one in advance.
  • the acquisition unit 1203 may be used.
  • the identification information acquisition unit 1210 does not need to have the collation unit 1204 and the identification unit 1205 (it may have only the recognition unit 1202 and the acquisition unit 1203).
  • the article whose existing position changes is a thick plate
  • articles that change their location are not limited to planks.
  • the article whose position changes may be a product other than plank.
  • the article whose existing position changes may be a manufactured product on which information managed by the manufacturer is displayed.
  • the article of manufacture may be, for example, a slab, a billet, a sheet coil, or a steel tube.
  • it may be an article other than a manufactured product.
  • the article whose existing position changes may be, for example, a container.
  • the article management device 1200 manages the position of an article whose existing position changes.
  • the article management device 1200 manages the positions of articles installed in the installation area.
  • the article whose location is to be managed is an article whose location is not subject to change.
  • the present embodiment and the first embodiment differ mainly in the configuration and processing due to the difference in whether or not the location of the article whose location is to be managed is assumed to change. Therefore, in the description of this embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIGS. 1 to 21, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • Examples of articles managed by the article management device 1200 of this embodiment include the articles shown in FIGS. 22 and 23.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a steel frame of a structure installed on the ground.
  • the installation area is the ground.
  • Structures are, for example, buildings and bridges.
  • FIG. 22 in order to simplify the notation, only a part of the steel frame of the structure is shown in a simplified manner.
  • the structural members 2201a to 2201b are uniquely identified on the surfaces of the structural members 2201a to 2201b that become beam members. A case where IDs 2202a to 2202b are displayed as information for the purpose will be exemplified.
  • the structural material is, for example, a metal material such as steel.
  • the structural members 2201a to 2201b are H-shaped steel.
  • ID2202a to 2202b are information corresponding to ID305 and ID312.
  • the IDs 2202a to 2202b are displayed, for example, by at least one of a stencil, handwriting, and engraving. Further, the IDs 2202a to 2202b may be displayed using labels. Further, information other than the IDs 2202a to 2202b may be displayed on the surfaces of the structural members 2201a to 2201b.
  • FIG. 22 exemplifies a case where the ID 2202 is displayed only on the structural members 2201a to 2201b among the structural members 2201a to 2201d.
  • information including information (ID) for uniquely identifying the structural members 2201c to 2201d may also be displayed on the surfaces of the structural members 2201c to 2201d.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a case where the connection between the structural member 2201a and the structural members 2201c to 2201d and the connection between the structural member 2201b and the structural members 2201c to 2201d are each performed by welding.
  • the method of connecting the structural members 2201a to 2201d is not limited to welding.
  • two structural members may be connected using a splice plate.
  • the structural members 2201a to 2201b including IDs 2202a to 2202b are A captured image of the area is captured using the first imaging device.
  • the IDs 2202a to 2202b (information for uniquely identifying the article) are hidden and become invisible after installation.
  • the role of the first captured image is the same as the role of the first captured image described in the first embodiment.
  • the first imaging device for example, a first imaging device held by an operator (worker) is used.
  • the first imaging device a first imaging device provided in an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) may be used.
  • the area of the structural members 2201a to 2201b including the IDs 2202a to 2202b will be referred to as the ID display area of the structural member, if necessary.
  • the ID display area of the structural material corresponds to the display area by the stencil (label) of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a pipe installed underground.
  • the pipe is, for example, at least one of a metal pipe, a clay pipe, a PVC pipe, and an insulated pipe.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a case where an ID 2302 is displayed on the surface of the pipe 2301a among the pipes 2301a to 2301c installed underground as information for uniquely identifying the pipe 2301a.
  • ID2302 is information corresponding to ID305 and ID312.
  • the ID 2302 is displayed, for example, by at least one of a stencil, handwriting, and engraving. Further, the ID 2302 may be displayed by a label. Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, information other than the ID 2302 may be displayed on the surface of the tube 2301a.
  • FIG. 23 exemplifies a case where the ID 2302 is displayed only on the tube 2301a among the tubes 2301a to 2301c.
  • information including information (ID) for uniquely identifying the tubes 2301b to 2301c may also be displayed on the surfaces of the tubes 2301b to 2301c.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a case where pipes 2301a to 2301c are connected using joint members 2303a to 2303b.
  • the method of connecting the pipes 2301a to 2301c is not limited to the method using joint members 2303a to 2303b.
  • a captured image of the region of the tube 2301a including the ID 2302 is captured using the first imaging device. Imaged.
  • the ID 2302 (information for uniquely identifying the article) is hidden and becomes invisible after installation.
  • the role of the first captured image is the same as the role of the first captured image described in the first embodiment.
  • the first imaging device for example, a first imaging device held by an operator (worker) is used. Further, as the first imaging device, a first imaging device provided in an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) may be used.
  • the area of the tube 2301a that includes the ID 2302 will be referred to as a tube ID display area, if necessary.
  • the ID display area of the tube corresponds to the stencil (label) display area of the first embodiment.
  • An example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the same as an example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12.
  • an example of the management table managed by the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the management table 2400 shown in FIG. 24.
  • the article management device 1200 when managing the positions of structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.), the article management device 1200 (storage unit 1207) Information used to manage the information is stored in the management table 2400.
  • the article management device 1200 stores information used for managing the positions of pipes (pipe 2301a, etc.) in the management table 2400. There's no need.
  • the article management device 1200 stores information used for managing the position of the pipe (such as the pipe 2301a) in the management table 2400.
  • the article management device 1200 stores information used for managing the positions of structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.) in the management table 2400. There's no need.
  • the information in the same column in Fig. 24 is the identification information for the same structural material (pipe) (the column under the same No. (It becomes a column where information is stored respectively).
  • structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.) and pipes (pipe 2301a, etc.) are referred to as position-fixing articles as necessary.
  • a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the flowchart shown in FIG. 25.
  • the flowchart explaining an example of the process of the article management device 1200 when managing the position of a structural member is different from the flowchart explaining an example of the process of the article management device 1200 when managing the position of a pipe. It becomes a flowchart.
  • the "position fixed article” in FIG. 25 means the "structural material”.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing of the article management apparatus 1200 when managing the position of a pipe
  • the "position-fixed article” in FIG. 25 means a "pipe.”
  • FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate a case where only IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are displayed on structural members 2201a to 2201b and pipe 2301a. Therefore, in the management table 2400 shown in FIG. 24, only the ID column in which the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are stored is shown in the actual item display column. However, if information other than the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 is displayed for the structural members 2201a to 2201b and the pipe 2301a, even if the column in which the information is stored is included in the actual product display column of the management table 2400. good.
  • the article position column of the management table 2400 stores information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article.
  • the information stored in the article position column is information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified by article management device 1200.
  • the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the pipe are the three-dimensional position of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the pipe, respectively.
  • the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the pipe are examples of information display positions.
  • the registration time column of the management table 2400 stores information indicating the date and time (timing determined from the date and time) when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position.
  • the date and time when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position refers to the date and time when the operation for acquiring the date and time was performed.
  • the imaging date and time of the first captured image is stored.
  • the information stored in the registration time column is not limited to the imaging date and time of the first captured image (this also applies to the first embodiment).
  • the operator may input information on the date and time when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position to the article management device 1200 by operating the user interface of the article management device 1200.
  • the information stored in the registration time column is an example of the date and time when an operation to obtain the date and time when the article was placed at the current position was performed.
  • the IDs 2202a to 2202b displayed on the structural members 2201a to 2201b become invisible due to painting or the like. Further, the ID 2302 displayed on the pipe 2301a is buried underground and becomes invisible. Even in such a case, the operator can grasp the elapsed time since the position-fixed article was installed based on the information stored in the registration time column. Therefore, for example, it can be determined whether the position-fixing article needs to be repaired or replaced, based on the elapsed time since the position-fixing article was installed. Also, based on the information stored in the ID column and the article position column, it is possible to determine which position-fixed article exists in which position, regardless of whether or not the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are visible.
  • the information stored in the management table 2400 can be used, for example, to repair or replace a position-fixed article whose ID (information for uniquely identifying the article) cannot be visually recognized.
  • the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may include columns other than the article position column and the registration time column.
  • the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may store a column of position within the article and a column of parent ID, similar to the management table 1300 of the first embodiment.
  • the position within the article is a position whose origin is a predetermined position (vertex 203, 204) on the thick plate.
  • a mark indicating the origin may be displayed at a predetermined position on the surface of the position-fixed article. For example, paint is used to display the mark.
  • a straight line parallel to the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the position-fixing article may be displayed on the surface of the position-fixing article.
  • paint is used to display the straight line.
  • the first imaging device captures a first image that includes the ID display area of the position-fixed article, the mark, and the straight line.
  • the position where the mark is displayed becomes the position within the article.
  • the straight line corresponds to the y-axis shown in FIGS. 14 and 15.
  • straight lines corresponding to the x-axis shown in FIG. 14 and the z-axis shown in FIG. 15 may be displayed on the surface of the position-fixed article.
  • the distance from the origin on the x-axis shown in FIG. 14 and the z-axis shown in FIG. 15 is determined in consideration of the curvature according to the outer diameter of the tube.
  • the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may include the article direction column described in ⁇ Fifth Modification>> of the first embodiment.
  • the tube does not have a plate surface. Therefore, for example, the angle between the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the tube and the reference plane is stored in the article orientation column.
  • the ID 2302 indicates that the direction in which the plurality of components ("4312" in the example shown in FIG. ) is displayed on the surface of the tube 2301a.
  • a column for the assumed article position is included in the non-actual item display column of the management table 2400 in addition to the article position. You may be In the article assumed position column, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified from the design drawing is stored.
  • a first image acquisition unit 1201, recognition unit 1202, acquisition unit 1203, matching unit 1204, identification unit 1205, position derivation unit 1206, storage unit 1207, output unit 1208, and second image acquisition unit A unit 1209 performs processing using a display area using a stencil (label).
  • the acquisition unit 1209 performs processing using the structural material ID display area and the pipe ID display area.
  • step S2505 of FIG. 25 the specifying unit 1205 specifies one position-fixed article from the position-fixed articles managed in the management table 2300, based on the result of the collation in step S2504.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article installed in the installation area. Therefore, for example, if it is assumed in advance from the design drawing which position-fixing article will be installed at which position, the determination in step S2508 in FIG. 25 may not be performed. In this case, the article management device 1200 does not need to include the second image acquisition unit 1209.
  • the position deriving unit 1206 uses a mathematical formula expressing the geometric positional relationship between the ID display area of the position-fixed article and the first imaging device, as in the first embodiment.
  • the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be derived.
  • the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the ID display area of the tube and the first imaging device is expressed using the curvature of the surface of the tube.
  • the ID display area of the position-fixed article and the first A three-dimensional positional relationship with the imaging device may be derived.
  • the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article when deriving the three-dimensional positional relationship between the ID display area of the tube and the first imaging device, as information on the ID display area of the position-fixed article, The shape and dimensions of the ID display area of the tube and the curvature of the surface of the tube are used. Furthermore, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be derived using the brightness image and the distance image.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 also calculates the difference between the three-dimensional position of the fixed article derived as described above and the three-dimensional position stored in the assumed article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table. It may be determined whether or not is within a predetermined range. In this case, the difference between the three-dimensional position of the fixed article derived as described above and the three-dimensional position stored in the assumed article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table is within a predetermined range. If not, the process of step S2512 may be performed.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 may perform the following processing in step S2509. That is, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the three-dimensional position stored in the column corresponding to the position-fixed article specified in step S2505 in the article assumed position column in the non-actual product display column of the management table in step S2505. It may also be derived as the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified in . However, if the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article is derived in this way, if the position-fixed article is not installed at the designed position, the correct three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article will not be derived. There are cases.
  • the worker calculates the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article based on the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article output in S2511. It is preferable to confirm whether the position fixing article is installed in its original position.
  • the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article installed in the installation area. Therefore, after the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article is derived by the position derivation unit 1206 in step S2509, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article does not necessarily need to be updated. This is indicated by the fact that "update” shown in steps S1710 and S1713 in FIG. 17 is changed to "storage” in steps S2510 and S2513 in FIG. 25. However, after the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article in step S2509, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be updated.
  • the worker based on the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article output in step S2511, if the three-dimensional position is clearly different from the actual three-dimensional position, the worker (operator) The article management device 1200 may be instructed to derive the three-dimensional position again. In this case, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 25 is executed again, and the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article can be updated in step S2510.
  • the article management device 1200 stores information displayed on a position-fixed article installed on the ground or underground, and the ID managed by the manufacturer of the position-fixed article.
  • a first captured image including the displayed display area is acquired.
  • the article management device 1200 determines the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the position-fixed article based on the acquired first captured image and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image.
  • Information indicating the three-dimensional position is stored in a storage medium in association with the ID of the position-fixed article.
  • the position of the position fixing article installed in the installation area can be appropriately managed.
  • the articles installed in the installation area are not limited to the structural material shown in FIG. 22 and the pipe shown in FIG. 23.
  • various modifications described in the first embodiment may be adopted in this embodiment as well.
  • embodiments of the present invention described above can be realized by a computer executing a program.
  • a computer-readable recording medium on which the program is recorded and a computer program product such as the program can also be applied as an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the recording medium for example, a flexible disk, hard disk, optical disk, magneto-optical disk, CD-ROM, magnetic tape, nonvolatile memory card, ROM, etc. can be used.
  • embodiments of the present invention may be realized by a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) or by dedicated hardware such as an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit).
  • the article management device 1200 includes a CPU 2601, a main storage device 2602, an auxiliary storage device 2603, a communication circuit 2604, a signal processing circuit 2605, an image processing circuit 2606, an I/F circuit 2607, a user interface 2608, a display 2609, and It has a bus 2610.
  • the CPU 2601 centrally controls the entire article management device 1200.
  • the CPU 2601 uses the main storage device 2602 as a work area to execute programs stored in the auxiliary storage device 2603.
  • Main storage device 2602 temporarily stores data.
  • the auxiliary storage device 2603 stores various data in addition to programs executed by the CPU 2601. Note that a processor other than the CPU (eg, GPU) may be used.
  • the communication circuit 2604 is a circuit for communicating with the outside of the article management device 1200.
  • the communication circuit 2604 may perform wireless communication or wired communication with the outside of the article management device 1200.
  • the signal processing circuit 2605 performs various signal processing on the signals received by the communication circuit 2604 and the signals input under the control of the CPU 2601.
  • the image processing circuit 2606 performs various image processing on the input signal under the control of the CPU 2601.
  • the signal subjected to this image processing is output to, for example, a display 2609.
  • the user interface 2608 is a part through which an operator gives instructions to the article management device 1200.
  • User interface 2608 includes, for example, buttons, switches, dials, and the like. Further, the user interface 2608 may include a graphical user interface using a display 2609.
  • Display 2609 displays an image based on the signal output from image processing circuit 2606.
  • the I/F circuit 2607 exchanges data with devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607.
  • FIG. 26 shows a user interface 2608 and a display 2609 as devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607.
  • the devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607 are not limited to these.
  • a portable storage medium may be connected to the I/F circuit 2607.
  • at least a portion of the user interface 2608 and the display 2609 may be located outside the article management device 1200.
  • the output unit 1208 is realized, for example, by using at least one of the communication circuit 2604, the signal processing circuit 2605, the image processing circuit 2606, the I/F circuit 2607, and the display 2609.
  • the CPU 2601, main storage device 2602, auxiliary storage device 2603, signal processing circuit 2605, image processing circuit 2606, and I/F circuit 2607 are connected to the bus 2610. Communication between these components occurs via bus 2610. Further, the hardware of the article management device 1200 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 26 as long as it can realize the functions of the article management device 1200 described above.
  • the present invention can be used, for example, to manage the location of articles.

Abstract

In the present invention, an article management device (1200) derives the three-dimensional position of the display area using a stencil (label) on the basis of a first captured image and the position of a first imaging device with which the first captured image has been captured, and stores information indicating the three-dimensional position in a storage medium in association with information for identifying the thick plate plate.

Description

物品管理装置、物品管理方法、物品管理用データのデータ構造、およびプログラムArticle management device, article management method, data structure of article management data, and program
 本発明は、物品管理装置、物品管理方法、物品管理用データのデータ構造、およびプログラムに関し、特に、物品を管理するために用いて好適なものである。 The present invention relates to an article management device, an article management method, a data structure of article management data, and a program, and is particularly suitable for use in managing articles.
 厚板を始めとする鉄鋼製品等の物品の位置を管理することが行われる。
 特許文献1に記載の技術では、鋼板を降ろしたときの天井クレーンのX-Y座標を当該鋼板の鋼板番号と共に登録することにより鋼板の位置を管理する。
The position of objects such as steel products such as thick plates is managed.
In the technique described in Patent Document 1, the position of the steel plate is managed by registering the XY coordinates of the overhead crane when the steel plate is lowered together with the steel plate number of the steel plate.
 また、特許文献2に記載の技術では、起重機の水平および垂直方向への移動並びに荷重検出等の動作に基づいて、定置場所算出プログラムにより、三次元座標により示される鋼材の定置場所を算出し、算出した定置場所を示す定置場所情報を当該鋼材の鋼材識別情報に対応付けて記憶する。 In addition, in the technology described in Patent Document 2, based on operations such as horizontal and vertical movement of a hoist and load detection, a fixed location calculation program calculates a fixed location for steel materials indicated by three-dimensional coordinates, The fixed location information indicating the calculated fixed location is stored in association with the steel material identification information of the steel material.
特許第5109451号公報Patent No. 5109451 特許第3734419号公報Patent No. 3734419
 しかしながら、特許文献1に記載の技術では、鋼板の位置の管理に用いる情報が天井クレーンのX-Y座標である。このため、天井クレーンで搬送することができる範囲でしか物品の位置を管理することができない。また、特許文献1に記載の技術では、天井クレーンのX-Y座標からZ座標を特定することができないので、例えば、複数の鋼板が積み重なる場合に、当該複数の鋼板を正確に特定することができない。 However, in the technology described in Patent Document 1, the information used to manage the position of the steel plate is the XY coordinates of the overhead crane. For this reason, the position of articles can only be managed within the range that can be transported by an overhead crane. Furthermore, with the technology described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to specify the Z coordinate from the XY coordinates of the overhead crane, so for example, when a plurality of steel plates are piled up, it is difficult to accurately specify the plurality of steel plates. Can not.
 また、特許文献2に記載の技術では、鋼材の三次元座標が算出される。しかしながら、特許文献1と同様に、起重機で搬送することができる範囲でしか物品の位置を管理することができない。また、特許文献2に記載の技術で算出される鋼材の三次元座標は、定置場所算出プログラムにより算出される定置場所の三次元座標である。従って、特許文献2に記載の技術では、定置場所算出プログラムで予め定められている定置場所でしか、鋼材の位置を管理することができない。 Furthermore, in the technique described in Patent Document 2, the three-dimensional coordinates of the steel material are calculated. However, similar to Patent Document 1, the position of the article can only be managed within the range that can be transported by the hoist. Further, the three-dimensional coordinates of the steel material calculated by the technique described in Patent Document 2 are the three-dimensional coordinates of the fixed location calculated by the fixed location calculation program. Therefore, with the technique described in Patent Document 2, the position of the steel material can be managed only at the fixed location that is predetermined by the fixed location calculation program.
 実際の製造現場においては、製造物は様々な搬送装置で搬送される場合がある。また、搬送装置を用いずに作業員が製造物を搬送する場合もある。また、置場番地が定められていない置場に製造物が置かれる場合がある。更に、製造物の置き方も様々である。特許文献1、2に記載の技術では、このような製造物の位置を管理することが容易ではない。これらの課題は、製造物以外の物品においても同様に存在する。 At actual manufacturing sites, products may be transported by various transport devices. Further, there are cases where a worker transports the product without using a transport device. In addition, manufactured products may be placed in storage areas for which no storage area address has been determined. Furthermore, there are various ways to place products. With the techniques described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, it is not easy to manage the positions of such products. These problems also exist in articles other than manufactured products.
 本発明は、以上のような問題点に鑑みてなされたものであり、物品の位置を適切に管理することができるようにすることを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to enable appropriate management of the positions of articles.
 本発明の物品管理装置は、物品の位置を管理する物品管理装置であって、前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得手段と、前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得手段と、前記画像取得手段により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出手段と、前記位置導出手段により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得手段により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶手段と、を有することを特徴とする。 The article management device of the present invention is an article management device that manages the position of articles, and includes one or more image acquisition means for acquiring a captured image of an area including display information displayed on the article; identification information acquisition means for acquiring identification information of an article; and position derivation means for deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition means. and storage means for storing the information display position on the article derived by the position derivation means in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired by the identification information acquisition means. shall be.
 本発明の物品管理方法は、物品の位置を管理する物品管理方法であって、前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得工程と、前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得工程と、前記画像取得工程により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出工程と、前記位置導出工程により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得工程により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶工程と、を有することを特徴とする。 The article management method of the present invention is an article management method for managing the position of an article, and includes one or more image acquisition steps of acquiring a captured image of an area including display information displayed on the article; an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article; and a position derivation step of deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired in the image acquisition step. and a storage step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position derivation step in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquisition step. shall be.
 本発明の物品管理用データのデータ構造は、物品に表示される表示情報と、前記物品に表示されない非表示情報と、有し、前記非表示情報は、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を含み、物品管理装置が、前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像に基づいて、当該物品における前記情報表示位置を導出するために用いられる。 The data structure of the article management data of the present invention includes display information that is displayed on the article and hidden information that is not displayed on the article, and the hidden information is a three-dimensional item on which the display information is displayed. The information display position is a position, and is used by an article management device to derive the information display position on the article based on a captured image of a region including display information displayed on the article.
 本発明のプログラムは、物品の位置を管理する処理をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムであって、前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得工程と、前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得工程と、前記画像取得工程により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出工程と、前記位置導出工程により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得工程により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶工程と、をコンピュータに実行させることを特徴とする。 The program of the present invention is a program for causing a computer to execute processing for managing the position of an article, and the program acquires one or more images of an area containing display information displayed on the article. an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article, and an information display position that is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition step. and a storage step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position derivation step in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquisition step. It is characterized by being executed by a computer.
図1は、工場における製品の流れの一例を説明する図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of products in a factory. 図2は、厚板に対する表示領域の一例を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display area for a thick plate. 図3Aは、ステンシルによる表示内容の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of display content using a stencil. 図3Bは、ラベルによる表示内容の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents by labels. 図4は、輸送船に対して厚板が荷積みおよび荷下ろしされる様子の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport ship. 図5は、厚板が荷役装置で吊り上げられている様子をガータの延設方向(y軸方向)から見た図である。FIG. 5 is a view of the plank being lifted by the cargo handling device as viewed from the direction in which the gutter extends (y-axis direction). 図6Aは、厚板の搬送形態の第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a first example of a thick plate conveyance mode. 図6Bは、厚板の搬送形態の第2の例を示す図である。FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a second example of the transport mode of the thick plate. 図6Cは、厚板の搬送形態の第3の例を示す図である。FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating a third example of the transport mode of the thick plate. 図6Dは、厚板の搬送形態の第4の例を示す図である。FIG. 6D is a diagram illustrating a fourth example of the transport mode of the thick plate. 図6Eは、厚板の搬送形態の第5の例を示す図である。FIG. 6E is a diagram illustrating a fifth example of the transport mode of the thick plate. 図7は、輸送車両に対して厚板が荷積みおよび荷下ろしされる様子の一例を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport vehicle. 図8は、輸送車両に厚板が荷積みされた状態の一例を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which thick plates are loaded onto a transport vehicle. 図9Aは、工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の様子の第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a first example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory. 図9Bは、工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の様子の第2の例を示す図である。FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a second example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory. 図9Cは、工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の様子の第3の例を示す図である。FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a third example of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory. 図10は、生産設備で厚板が処理される様子の一例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of how a thick plate is processed in a production facility. 図11は、元の厚板と、切断後の厚板の一例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the original plank and the plank after cutting. 図12は、物品管理装置の機能的な構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of the functional configuration of the article management device. 図13は、管理テーブルの第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example of the management table. 図14は、ステンシルの物品内位置と、ステンシルによる表示における各表示項目の構成要素の位置の一例を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display using the stencil. 図15は、ラベルの物品内位置と、ラベルによる表示における各表示項目の構成要素の位置の一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the label in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display by the label. 図16Aは、管理テーブルに記憶される情報の第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a first example of information stored in the management table. 図16Bは、管理テーブルに記憶される情報の第2の例を示す図である。FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a second example of information stored in the management table. 図17は、物品管理装置の処理の第1の例を説明するフローチャートである。FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first example of processing by the article management device. 図18は、ステンシルによる表示領域の三次元位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving a three-dimensional position of a display area using a stencil. 図19は、ステンシルによる表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of a display area using a stencil. 図20Aは、ステンシルによる表示領域を含む第1の撮像画像の一例を示す図である。FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of a first captured image including a display area formed by a stencil. 図20Bは、第1の撮像装置の内部とステンシルによる表示領域との幾何学的関係の一例を示す図である。FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of the geometrical relationship between the inside of the first imaging device and the display area formed by the stencil. 図21は、ステンシルによる表示領域の三次元位置を導出する方法の変形例を説明する図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the method of deriving the three-dimensional position of the display area using a stencil. 図22は、地面に据え付けられた構造物の鉄骨の一例を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a steel frame of a structure installed on the ground. 図23は、地中に据え付けられた管の一例を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a pipe installed underground. 図24は、管理テーブルの第2の例を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a second example of the management table. 図25は、物品管理装置の処理の第2の例を説明するフローチャートである。FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of processing by the article management device. 図26は、物品管理装置のハードウェアの構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of the article management device.
 以下、図面を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態を説明する。
 尚、長さ、位置、大きさ、間隔等、比較対象が同じであることは、厳密に同じである場合の他、発明の主旨を逸脱しない範囲で異なるもの(例えば、設計時に定められる公差の範囲内で異なるもの)も含むものとする。
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
Note that the comparison objects are the same in terms of length, position, size, spacing, etc., as well as cases in which they are strictly the same, and items that are different within the scope of the invention (for example, due to tolerances determined at the time of design). This shall also include items that are different within the scope.
(第1の実施形態)
 まず、第1の実施形態を説明する。本実施形態では、時間の経過と共に位置が変更され、置かれる位置が時間の経過と共に変更される物品の位置を管理する場合を例示する。このような位置の管理は、トラッキングとも称される。トラッキングとは、対象物の位置を追跡して特定することである。本実施形態では、複数の製鉄所で製造された各種の厚板(例えば厚鋼板)に対して、熱処理や切断等の各種の処理を行う工場を含む場所において、当該厚板の位置を管理する場合を例示する。そこで、まず、本実施形態の適用対象の工場の概要を説明する。
(First embodiment)
First, a first embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, a case will be exemplified in which the position of an article is changed over time, and the position of an article is changed over time. Such location management is also referred to as tracking. Tracking refers to tracking and specifying the position of an object. In this embodiment, the position of various thick plates (for example, thick steel plates) manufactured at multiple steel mills is managed in a place including a factory that performs various treatments such as heat treatment and cutting. Illustrate a case. Therefore, first, an overview of the factory to which this embodiment is applied will be explained.
<工場の概要>
 図1は、本実施形態の適用対象の工場における製品の流れの一例を説明する図である。
<Factory overview>
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of products in a factory to which this embodiment is applied.
 図1において、製鉄所で製造された厚板は輸送船に荷積みされる。その後輸送船は、工場の近くの岸壁に着岸する。厚板は、輸送船から荷下ろしされ、輸送車両(トラック等)に荷積みされる。輸送車両により輸送された厚板は、工場に入荷すると、工場内の置場に置かれる。置場に置かれた厚板は、熱処理や切断(ガス切断)等の処理が施された後、倉庫に置かれる。その後、厚板は、工場から需要家に向けて出荷される。 In Figure 1, plates manufactured at a steel mill are loaded onto a transport ship. The transport ship then docks at a quay near the factory. The planks are unloaded from the transport vessel and loaded onto a transport vehicle (such as a truck). When the plates transported by transport vehicles arrive at the factory, they are placed in a storage area within the factory. The planks placed in the storage area are subjected to processes such as heat treatment and cutting (gas cutting) before being placed in the warehouse. Thereafter, the plates are shipped from the factory to customers.
<着想>
 以上のようにして搬送される厚板の位置を、特許文献1、2に記載の技術のように、搬送機器の動作に基づいて管理すると、位置を管理することができる範囲に制約が生じる。そこで、本発明者らは、現品管理(各厚板の位置の管理)のために、厚板には、当該厚板の製造メーカによって管理されている情報が表示されていることに着目した。このような情報の表示位置を管理することは、厚板の位置を管理することと等価である。そして、このような厚板の製造メーカによって管理されている情報を特定することができれば、厚板を識別することができる。本実施形態は、このような思想に基づいてなされたものである。
<Idea>
If the position of the thick plate transported as described above is managed based on the operation of the transport device as in the techniques described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there will be restrictions on the range in which the position can be managed. Therefore, the present inventors focused on the fact that information managed by the manufacturer of the thick plate is displayed on the thick plate for the purpose of managing the actual product (management of the position of each thick plate). Managing the display position of such information is equivalent to managing the position of a thick plate. If the information managed by the manufacturer of such a thick plate can be specified, the thick plate can be identified. This embodiment is based on this idea.
<厚板に対して施される表示>
 図2は、厚板に対する表示領域の一例を示す図である。尚、図2に示すx軸、y軸、z軸は、図2と、後述する図3A、図3B、図14~図15、図18~図19、図21との向きの関係を示すものであり、図4および図5に示すx-y-z座標の向きとは必ずしも対応しない。尚、x-y-z座標は、例えば、世界座標系で表される座標である。
 図2において、表示領域201は、ステンシルによる表示領域である。図2に示す例では、ステンシルによる表示領域201は、厚板の板面に存在する。尚、図2に示す破線は仮想線であり、実際には表示されない。図2に示す例では、ラベル(サイドラベル)202は、厚板の側面(板厚部分)に貼り付けられる。
<Displays given to thick plates>
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display area for a thick plate. Note that the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis shown in FIG. 2 indicate the directional relationship between FIG. 2 and FIGS. 3A, 3B, 14 to 15, 18 to 19, and 21, which will be described later. , which does not necessarily correspond to the xyz coordinate directions shown in FIGS. 4 and 5. Note that the xyz coordinates are, for example, coordinates expressed in the world coordinate system.
In FIG. 2, a display area 201 is a stencil display area. In the example shown in FIG. 2, the stencil display area 201 exists on the plate surface of the thick plate. Note that the broken lines shown in FIG. 2 are virtual lines and are not actually displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 2, the label (side label) 202 is attached to the side surface (thick part) of the thick plate.
 図3Aは、ステンシルによる表示内容の一例を示す図である。尚、前述したように図3Aに示すx-y-z座標は、図2等との向きの関係を示すものである。また、図3Aに示すx-y-z座標において、白丸(〇)の中に黒丸(●)を付している記号は、紙面の奥側から手前側に向かうことを示す。このようなx-y-z座標の表記は、その他の図でも同じである。
 図3Aに示す例では、ステンシルによる表示には、マーク301、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、および注文番号307が含まれる。
FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of display content using a stencil. Note that, as described above, the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3A indicate the directional relationship with FIG. 2, etc. Furthermore, in the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3A, a symbol with a black circle (●) inside a white circle (○) indicates that it goes from the back side of the page to the front side. This representation of xyz coordinates is the same in other figures.
In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the stencil display includes a mark 301, a customer name 302, a standard 303, a size 304, an ID 305, a customer code 306, and an order number 307.
 マーク301は、厚板の製造メーカを表すマークである。需要家名302は、厚板の需要家(購入者)を示す情報である。規格303は、厚板の規格を示す情報である。サイズ304は、厚板のサイズ(例えば、厚み×幅×長さ)を示す情報である。ID305は、厚板を一意に識別するための情報であり、図3Aに示す例では、板番号(厚板の識別番号)である。従って、同じIDが異なる厚板に付されることはない。需要家コード306は、厚板の製造メーカが需要家から厚板に対して付すことが指定された情報である。注文番号307は、需要家からの厚板の注文を識別するための番号の一部である。 The mark 301 is a mark representing the manufacturer of the thick plate. The consumer name 302 is information indicating a consumer (purchaser) of the thick plate. Standard 303 is information indicating the standard of the thick plate. The size 304 is information indicating the size of the thick plate (for example, thickness x width x length). The ID 305 is information for uniquely identifying the thick plate, and in the example shown in FIG. 3A, it is the plate number (the identification number of the thick plate). Therefore, the same ID will not be assigned to different planks. The customer code 306 is information specified by the customer to be attached to the thick plate by the manufacturer of the thick plate. The order number 307 is part of a number for identifying a thick plate order from a customer.
 マーク301、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、および注文番号307は、厚板に対して一般的に表示され得る情報である。尚、ID305以外の情報は、ステンシルによる表示に含まれていなくてもよい。また、前述した情報以外の情報が、ステンシルによる表示に含まれていてもよい。 The mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that can be generally displayed for thick plates. Note that information other than the ID 305 does not need to be included in the stencil display. Furthermore, information other than the information described above may be included in the stencil display.
 尚、例えば、需要家によって、需要家コード306の桁数が異なったり、厚板を製造する製鉄所によって規格303の表記方法が異なったりする。また、例えば、注文番号307は、需要家によって付される場合と付されない場合とがある。また、表示項目の大きさも、厚板を製造する製鉄所によって異なる場合がある。また、ステンシルによる表示領域の位置も、厚板を製造する製鉄所によって異なる場合がある。このように、ステンシルによる表示の内容、位置、および大きさは、厚板を製造する製鉄所および需要家等によって異なる。 Note that, for example, the number of digits of the customer code 306 differs depending on the customer, and the notation method of the standard 303 differs depending on the steelworks that manufacture thick plates. Further, for example, the order number 307 may or may not be assigned by the consumer. Furthermore, the sizes of display items may also vary depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plates. Further, the position of the display area by the stencil may also differ depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plate. As described above, the content, position, and size of the stencil display vary depending on the steelworks that manufacture the thick plates, the customers, and the like.
 マーク301、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、および注文番号307は、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報である。また、マーク301、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、および注文番号307は、人が識別可能な情報である。人が識別可能な情報とは、人が当該情報を見た場合に当該情報の意味を理解できることを指す。バーコードおよび2次元コードのように、情報の作成および読み取りに、機械によるエンコードおよびデコードが必要となる情報は、人が識別可能な情報ではない。具体的に、マーク301、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、および注文番号307は、読み取りに機械によるデコードが不要な情報として、文字、数字、および記号の少なくとも1つを含み、読み取りに機械によるデコードが必要な情報を含まない。 The mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Further, the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that can be identified by a person. Information that can be identified by a person means that a person can understand the meaning of the information when looking at the information. Information that requires machine encoding and decoding to create and read information, such as barcodes and two-dimensional codes, is not human-identifiable information. Specifically, the mark 301, customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, and order number 307 are information that does not require machine decoding to read, and are at least letters, numbers, and symbols. Contains one and does not contain information that requires machine decoding to read.
 図3Bは、ラベルによる表示内容の一例を示す図である。尚、前述したように図3Bに示すx-y-z座標は、図2等との向きの関係を示すものである。また、図3Bに示すx-y-z座標において、白丸の中に×(クロスマーク)を付している記号は、紙面の手前側から奥側に向かう方向を示す。このようなx-y-z座標の表記は、その他の図でも同じである。
 図3Bに示す例では、ラベルによる表示には、規格311、ID312、サイズ313、納期314、および需要家コード315が含まれる。納期314は、厚板の納期を示す情報である。規格311、ID312、サイズ313、需要家コード315は、それぞれ、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306と同じものである。尚、ID312以外の情報は、ラベルによる表示に含まれていなくてもよい。また、前述した情報以外の情報が、ラベルによる表示に含まれていてもよい。ラベルによる表示の内容、位置、および大きさも、ステンシルによる表示と同様に、厚板を製造する製鉄所および需要家等によって異なる。
FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents by labels. Note that, as described above, the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3B indicate the directional relationship with FIG. 2, etc. Furthermore, in the xyz coordinates shown in FIG. 3B, a symbol with an x (cross mark) inside a white circle indicates a direction from the front side to the back side of the page. This representation of xyz coordinates is the same in other figures.
In the example shown in FIG. 3B, the label display includes a standard 311, an ID 312, a size 313, a delivery date 314, and a customer code 315. The delivery date 314 is information indicating the delivery date of the thick plate. Standard 311, ID 312, size 313, and customer code 315 are the same as standard 303, size 304, ID 305, and customer code 306, respectively. Note that information other than the ID 312 does not need to be included in the label display. Furthermore, information other than the information described above may be included in the label display. The content, position, and size of the label display also vary depending on the steel mill that manufactures the plate, the customer, etc., similar to the stencil display.
 ただし、同一の厚板に対する同一の表示項目が意味する内容は、ステンシルによる表示と、ラベルによる表示とで同じにする。従って、図3Aに示すステンシルによる表示と、図3Bに示すラベルによる表示とが同じ厚板に対して行われる場合、ステンシルにより表示されるID305と、ラベルにより表示されるID312とは同じ内容を意味するものとなる。また、ステンシルにより表示される規格303と、ラベルに表示される規格311とは同じ内容を意味するものとなる。サイズ313、需要家コード315についても、それぞれ、サイズ304、需要家コード306と同じ内容を意味するものになる。前述したように、規格303、ID305、サイズ304、および需要家コード306は、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報である。従って、規格311、ID312、サイズ313、および需要家コード315も、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報である。また、厚板の納期314も、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報である。また、規格311、ID312、サイズ313、納期314、および需要家コード315は、人が識別可能な情報である。
 尚、厚板には、以上のような表示の他に、例えば、刻印による表示が施されることがある。また、厚板には、手書きによる表示が施されることがある。
However, the meaning of the same display item for the same plate shall be the same for both stencil and label display. Therefore, when the display using the stencil shown in FIG. 3A and the display using the label shown in FIG. Become something to do. Further, the standard 303 displayed by the stencil and the standard 311 displayed on the label mean the same content. The size 313 and customer code 315 also have the same meaning as the size 304 and customer code 306, respectively. As described above, the standard 303, ID 305, size 304, and customer code 306 are information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Therefore, the standard 311, ID 312, size 313, and customer code 315 are also information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Further, the thick plate delivery date 314 is also information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. Further, the standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315 are information that can be identified by a person.
In addition to the above-mentioned markings, the thick plate may be marked with markings, for example. In addition, handwritten markings may be applied to the planks.
<厚板の搬送形態>
<<輸送船による輸送>>
 図4は、輸送船に対して厚板が荷積みおよび荷下ろしされる様子の一例を示す図である。図4では、輸送船400に対して、ガントリークレーン410を用いて厚板を荷積みおよび荷下ろしされる場合を例示する。図5は、厚板420が荷役装置411で吊り上げられている様子をガータ412の延設方向(y軸方向)から見た図である。図4および図5に示すx-y-z座標は、図4および図5の向きの関係を示すものである。
 ガントリークレーン410は、荷役装置(トロリー等)411、ガータ(横行桁)412、および脚構造物413を有する、荷役装置411は、搬送対象物を吊り上げた状態で、ガータ412の延設方向(y軸方向)に沿って移動する。図4では、厚板420が、荷役装置411で吊り上げられ移動する様子を示す。厚板420が荷役装置411で吊り上げられている様子をガータ412の延設方向(y軸方向)から見ると、図5に示すようになる。
<Transportation mode of thick plate>
<<Transportation by transport ship>>
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport ship. FIG. 4 illustrates a case where thick plates are loaded and unloaded onto and from a transport ship 400 using a gantry crane 410. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the plank 420 being lifted by the cargo handling device 411 as viewed from the direction in which the gutter 412 extends (y-axis direction). The xyz coordinates shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 indicate the orientation relationships in FIGS. 4 and 5.
The gantry crane 410 includes a cargo handling device (such as a trolley) 411, a girder (traversing girder) 412, and a leg structure 413. axial direction). FIG. 4 shows how the plank 420 is lifted and moved by the cargo handling device 411. FIG. 5 shows how the thick plate 420 is lifted by the cargo handling device 411 when viewed from the direction in which the gutter 412 extends (the y-axis direction).
 尚、図4および図5では、荷役装置411により、1枚の厚板420が吊り上げられる様子を例示する。しかしながら、荷役装置411による厚板の搬送形態は、このような搬送形態に限定されない。図6A~図6Eは、厚板の搬送形態の第1~第5の例を示す図である。図6A~図6Eでは、荷役装置411をより簡略化して示す。 Note that FIGS. 4 and 5 illustrate how one thick plate 420 is lifted by the cargo handling device 411. However, the manner in which thick plates are conveyed by the cargo handling device 411 is not limited to such a manner. FIGS. 6A to 6E are diagrams showing first to fifth examples of conveyance modes for thick plates. 6A to 6E, the cargo handling device 411 is shown in a more simplified manner.
 図6Aでは、水平面(x-y平面)方向に2枚の厚板が並べられた状態で荷役装置411により同時に搬送されている状態を例示する。図6Bでは、荷役装置411のtop側(x軸の負の方向側)において1枚の厚板が搬送されている状態を例示する。図6Cでは、荷役装置411のbottom側(x軸の正の方向側)において1枚の厚板が搬送されている状態を例示する。図6Dでは、荷役装置411の中央において1枚の厚板が搬送されている状態を例示する。図6Eでは、複数枚(2枚)の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で荷役装置411により同時に搬送されている状態を例示する。このように、本実施形態では、複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で同時に搬送されている場合がある。 FIG. 6A illustrates a state in which two thick plates are arranged side by side in the horizontal plane (xy plane) and are simultaneously conveyed by the cargo handling device 411. FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported on the top side (the negative direction side of the x-axis) of the cargo handling device 411. FIG. 6C illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported on the bottom side (positive direction side of the x-axis) of the cargo handling device 411. FIG. 6D illustrates a state in which one thick plate is being transported at the center of the cargo handling device 411. FIG. 6E illustrates a state in which a plurality of (two) thick plates are stacked and transported simultaneously by the cargo handling device 411. In this manner, in this embodiment, a plurality of thick plates may be stacked and transported at the same time.
 以上のように、荷役装置411による厚板の搬送形態は限定されない。また、荷役装置411による厚板の吊り上げの手法は、マグネットによる磁気吸引力を利用した手法でも、ハッカーを利用した手法でも、その他の手法でもよい。
 ガントリークレーン410自体は、公知の技術で説明することができるので、ここでは詳細な説明を省略する。
As described above, the manner in which thick plates are transported by the cargo handling device 411 is not limited. Further, the method for lifting the plank by the cargo handling device 411 may be a method using magnetic attraction of a magnet, a method using a hacker, or any other method.
Since the gantry crane 410 itself can be explained using a known technique, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.
 製鉄所で製造された厚板は、岸壁に運ばれ、ガントリークレーン410で搬送可能な所定の置場に置かれる。図4に示すように複数枚の厚板は、積み重ねられた状態で所定の置場に置かれる場合がある。厚板が1枚ずつ所定の置場に置かれる場合もある。また、図4等では、表記の都合上、複数枚の厚板の厚み(板厚)が同じである場合を例示する。しかしながら、複数枚の厚板の厚みが異なる場合がある。即ち、所定の置場に置かれる厚板の厚み、幅、および長さの少なくとも1つが異なる場合がある。 The thick plates manufactured at the steel mill are transported to the quay and placed at a predetermined location where they can be transported by the gantry crane 410. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of planks may be placed in a predetermined location in a stacked state. In some cases, the planks are placed one by one in a predetermined place. Moreover, in FIG. 4 etc., the case where the thickness (plate thickness) of several sheets of thick plates is the same is illustrated for convenience of description. However, the thicknesses of the plurality of planks may differ. That is, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks placed in a given location may differ.
 図4では、厚板の板面が、厚板が置かれる面と平行となるように複数の厚板を重ねて置く場合を例示する。ただし、厚板を重ねて置く方法は、このような方法に限定されない。例えば、厚板の板面が、厚板が置かれる面と垂直または垂直に近い角度となるように複数の厚板を重ねて置く場合もある。このことは、岸壁の所定の置場以外の位置においても同じである。 In FIG. 4, a case is illustrated in which a plurality of thick plates are placed one on top of the other so that the plate surface of the thick plate is parallel to the surface on which the thick plate is placed. However, the method of stacking the planks is not limited to this method. For example, a plurality of planks may be placed one on top of the other so that the surface of the plank is perpendicular or nearly perpendicular to the surface on which the plank is placed. This also applies to locations other than the predetermined locations on the quay.
 本実施形態では、ガータ412および脚構造物413に、第1の撮像装置430a~430fが取り付けられている。第1の撮像装置430a~430fの数および位置は、厚板のステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域としてできるだけ多くの厚板の表示領域が撮像されるように設定される。また、荷役装置411にも、第1の撮像装置430g~430mが取り付けられている。第1の撮像装置430a~430mの数および位置は、第1の撮像装置430a~430mの少なくとも1つの撮像装置で、ガントリークレーン410により搬送中の厚板420のステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域の少なくとも一方が可及的に撮像されるように設定される。 In this embodiment, first imaging devices 430a to 430f are attached to the garter 412 and the leg structure 413. The number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430f are set so that as many display areas of the plank as possible are imaged as the display area 201 of the plank stencil and the display area of the label 202 of the plank. Further, first imaging devices 430g to 430m are also attached to the cargo handling device 411. The number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m are at least one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m, and the number and position of the first imaging devices 430a to 430m are determined by the stencil display area 201 and label 202 of the plank 420 being transported by the gantry crane 410. At least one of the display areas is set to be imaged as much as possible.
 第1の撮像装置430a~430mは、撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)を調整することが可能となっている。当該撮像条件の調整は、オペレータ(作業員)が第1の撮像装置を操作することにより行われても、外部装置からの指示に基づいて自動的に行われてもよい。また、例えば、ガータ412に取り付けられる第1の撮像装置430g~430mのうち、搬送中の厚板420に近い位置に取り付けられる第1の撮像装置430i~430mは、ファイバースコープカメラであってもよい。ファイバースコープカメラを用いれば、例えば、搬送中の厚板420のステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域を接写することができる。 The first imaging devices 430a to 430m are capable of adjusting imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.). The adjustment of the imaging conditions may be performed by an operator (worker) operating the first imaging device, or may be performed automatically based on instructions from an external device. Further, for example, among the first imaging devices 430g to 430m attached to the gutter 412, the first imaging devices 430i to 430m attached to a position close to the plank 420 being transported may be a fiberscope camera. . If a fiberscope camera is used, for example, it is possible to take close-up pictures of the display area 201 formed by the stencil and the display area formed by the label 202 of the thick plate 420 being transported.
 尚、第1の撮像装置によって撮像される撮像画像は、静止画像に限定されず、動画像であってもよい。第1の撮像装置によって撮像される撮像画像が動画像である場合、第1の撮像装置によって撮像された動画像から取り出された画像(すなわち、動画像のフレームの画像)が後述する物品管理装置1200で用いられる。このようにする場合、第1の撮像装置によって撮像された動画像から、第1の撮像装置で撮像される被写体にできるだけピントが合った静止画像が取り出されるようにするのが好ましい。このように撮像装置によって撮像される撮像画像が静止画像に限定されないことは、後述する第2の撮像装置~第7の撮像装置においても同じである。 Note that the captured image captured by the first imaging device is not limited to a still image, and may be a moving image. When the captured image captured by the first imaging device is a moving image, the image extracted from the moving image captured by the first imaging device (i.e., the image of the frame of the moving image) is the article management device described below. Used in 1200. In this case, it is preferable to extract a still image in which the subject imaged by the first imaging device is in focus as much as possible from the moving image imaged by the first imaging device. The fact that the captured image captured by the imaging device is not limited to a still image in this way also applies to the second to seventh imaging devices described later.
 製鉄所から搬送された厚板は、ガントリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれる。ガントリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれた厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430c~430fにより撮像される。オペレータ(作業員)は、ガントリークレーン410の操作室にある情報処理端末や、ガントリークレーン410のオペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの情報処理端末(タブレット端末等)を操作して、第1の撮像装置430c~430fに対してプレビュー画像の表示指示を行う。第1の撮像装置430c~430fは、プレビュー画像の表示指示に基づいて、プレビュー画像を、当該情報処理端末に送信する。そうすると、当該情報処理端末によりプレビュー画像が表示される。オペレータ(作業員)は、当該情報処理端末を操作して、撮影すべきステンシルによる表示領域が表示されたプレビュー画像を撮像している第1の撮像装置に対して撮像指示を行う。第1の撮像装置430c~430fは、撮像指示を受信すると、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域の撮像画像を撮像する。尚、プレビュー画像は、オペレータ(作業員)による確認のために表示されるライブ画像であり、プレビュー画像の表示指示に基づいて表示されるものとする。撮像画像は、プレビュー画像が表示されているときに撮像指示に基づいて撮像される画像であるものとする。また、ここでは、プレビュー画像を表示する場合を例示するが、必ずしもプレビュー画像を表示する必要はない。 The thick plate transported from the steelworks is placed at a predetermined location on the gantry crane 410. An area of the thick plate placed at a predetermined location of the gantry crane 410, including the stencil display area 201, is imaged by the first imaging devices 430c to 430f. The operator (worker) operates the information processing terminal in the operation room of the gantry crane 410 or the information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.) held by the operator (worker) of the gantry crane 410 to operate the first imaging device. A preview image display instruction is given to 430c to 430f. The first imaging devices 430c to 430f transmit the preview image to the information processing terminal based on the preview image display instruction. Then, a preview image is displayed by the information processing terminal. An operator (worker) operates the information processing terminal to issue an imaging instruction to a first imaging device that is imaging a preview image in which a display area of a stencil to be photographed is displayed. Upon receiving the imaging instruction, the first imaging devices 430c to 430f capture an image of an area including the stencil display area 201. Note that the preview image is a live image displayed for confirmation by the operator (worker), and is displayed based on a preview image display instruction. It is assumed that the captured image is an image that is captured based on an imaging instruction while a preview image is being displayed. Further, although a case where a preview image is displayed is illustrated here, it is not always necessary to display the preview image.
 複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられて同時に搬送される場合、下にある厚板については、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域を撮像することができない。この場合、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域の撮像画像に代えて、ラベル202による表示領域を含む領域の撮像画像が撮像される。 When a plurality of planks are stacked and transported at the same time, it is not possible to image the area including the stencil display area 201 of the plank below. In this case, instead of the captured image of the area including the display area 201 by the stencil, a captured image of the area including the display area by the label 202 is captured.
 厚板が置かれる位置によっては、ステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域が、第1の撮像装置430c~430fの撮像範囲に含まれない場合がある。この場合、オペレータ(作業員)は、第1の撮像装置を備える無人航空機(ドローン)440a~440bを操作して、所望の厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域(またはラベル202による表示領域を含む領域)の撮像画像を、第1の撮像装置を用いて撮像してもよい。また、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置により、所望の厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域(またはラベル202による表示領域を含む領域)の撮像画像を撮像してもよい。尚、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置は、例えば、第1の撮像装置を備える情報端末装置(タブレット端末やスマートフォン等)であってもよい。 Depending on the position where the plank is placed, the stencil display area 201 and the label 202 display area may not be included in the imaging range of the first imaging devices 430c to 430f. In this case, an operator (worker) operates an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) 440a to 440b equipped with a first imaging device to display an area of a desired plank including the display area 201 by the stencil (or the display area by the label 202). The first imaging device may be used to capture an image of the region (including the region). Alternatively, an image of the area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of a desired thick plate may be captured using the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). good. Note that the first imaging device held by the operator (worker) may be, for example, an information terminal device (tablet terminal, smartphone, etc.) including the first imaging device.
 尚、前述した第1の撮像装置430c~430fによるプレビュー画像の表示と撮像画像の撮像は、第1の撮像装置430c~430f以外の第1の撮像装置430a~430b、430g~430wにおいても同様に実行される。また、複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられて同時に搬送される場合に、ラベル202による表示領域を含む領域の撮像画像を撮像することは、第1の撮像装置430c~430f以外の第1の撮像装置430a~430b、430g~430wにおいても同様に実行される。また、ステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域が、第1の撮像装置430c~430fの撮像範囲に含まれない場合の撮像の方法は、第1の撮像装置430c~430f以外の第1の撮像装置430a~430b、430g~430wについても同じである。従って、以下において、第1の撮像装置430c~430f以外の第1の撮像装置430a~430b、430g~430wについてのこれらの詳細な説明を省略する。 Note that the display of preview images and the capturing of captured images by the first imaging devices 430c to 430f described above are performed similarly in the first imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w other than the first imaging devices 430c to 430f. executed. Further, when a plurality of planks are stacked and conveyed at the same time, capturing an image of an area including the display area of the label 202 is performed by a first image capturing device other than the first image capturing devices 430c to 430f. 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w are similarly executed. Furthermore, when the display area 201 by the stencil and the display area by the label 202 are not included in the imaging range of the first imaging devices 430c to 430f, the imaging method is as follows: The same applies to the imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w. Therefore, detailed description of the first imaging devices 430a to 430b and 430g to 430w other than the first imaging devices 430c to 430f will be omitted below.
 厚板は、ガントリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれた後、ガントリークレーン410により輸送船400に荷積みされる。複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で同時に輸送船400に荷積みされる場合がある。厚板が1枚ずつ輸送船400に荷積みされる場合もある。また、輸送船400に荷積みされる厚板の厚み、幅、および長さの少なくとも1つが異なる場合がある。 After the planks are placed at a predetermined location on the gantry crane 410, they are loaded onto the transport ship 400 by the gantry crane 410. A plurality of planks may be stacked and loaded onto the transport ship 400 at the same time. In some cases, the planks are loaded onto the transport ship 400 one by one. Furthermore, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks loaded onto the transport ship 400 may be different.
 ガントリークレーン410により搬送中の厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域の撮像画像が、荷役装置411に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430g~430mにより撮像される。 A captured image of the area including the stencil display area 201 of the thick plate being transported by the gantry crane 410 is captured by first imaging devices 430g to 430m attached to the cargo handling device 411.
 厚板が輸送船400に荷積みされると、当該厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域の撮像画像が、ガータ412に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430a~430bまたは輸送船400に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430nにより撮像される。輸送船400に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430nも、第1の撮像装置430a~430mと同様に、撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)を調整することが可能となっている。尚、図4では、表記の都合上、輸送船400に取り付けられる第1の撮像装置の数を1つとしている。しかしながら、輸送船400には、厚板が置かれる領域が撮像範囲に含まれるように複数の第1の撮像装置が取り付けられている。 When the plank is loaded onto the transport ship 400, a captured image of the area of the plank including the stencil display area 201 is captured by the first imaging devices 430a to 430b attached to the gutter 412 or the transport ship 400. The image is captured by a first imaging device 430n attached to the. The first imaging device 430n attached to the transport ship 400 also adjusts the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. It is now possible to do so. Note that in FIG. 4, for convenience of notation, the number of first imaging devices attached to the transport ship 400 is one. However, a plurality of first imaging devices are attached to the transport ship 400 so that the area where the plank is placed is included in the imaging range.
 以上のようにして厚板が荷積みされた輸送船400は、工場の近くの岸壁に着岸する。前述したように輸送船400から厚板が荷下ろしされる。前述したように本実施形態では、ガントリークレーン410を用いて厚板が荷下ろしされる。ガントリークレーン410により搬送中の厚板についても、輸送船400に荷積みする場合と同様にして撮像画像が撮像される。また、ガンドリークレーン410により荷下ろしされ、ガンドリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれると、当該厚板についても、製鉄所から搬送されてガントリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれる場合と同様にして撮像画像が撮像される。 The transport ship 400 loaded with thick plates as described above docks at a quay near the factory. As described above, the planks are unloaded from the transport ship 400. As described above, in this embodiment, the gantry crane 410 is used to unload the thick plates. Images of the thick plates being transported by the gantry crane 410 are also captured in the same manner as when loading the plates onto the transport ship 400. Further, when the plate is unloaded by the Gundry crane 410 and placed at a predetermined location of the Gundry crane 410, the plate is also treated in the same manner as when it is transported from a steelworks and placed at a predetermined location of the Gantry crane 410. A captured image is captured.
<<輸送車両による輸送>>
 ガンドリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれた厚板は、輸送車両に荷積みされる。図7は、輸送車両に対して厚板が荷積みおよび荷下ろしされる様子の一例を示す図である。ガンドリークレーン410の所定の置場に置かれた厚板は、不図示のクレーン等を用いて輸送車両700に荷積みされる。図7に示すように複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で同時に輸送車両700に荷積みされる場合がある。ただし、厚板が1枚ずつ輸送車両700に荷積みされる場合もある。また、輸送車両700に荷積みされる厚板の厚み、幅、および長さの少なくとも1つが異なる場合がある。また、図6A~図6Eに示したようにして厚板を搬送して輸送車両700に荷積みしてもよい。
<<Transportation by transport vehicle>>
The plank placed at a predetermined location on Gundry crane 410 is loaded onto a transport vehicle. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of how planks are loaded and unloaded onto a transport vehicle. The planks placed at a predetermined location of Gundry crane 410 are loaded onto transport vehicle 700 using a crane (not shown) or the like. As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of planks may be stacked and loaded onto a transport vehicle 700 at the same time. However, the planks may be loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 one by one. Furthermore, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 may be different. Alternatively, the planks may be transported and loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E.
 図8は、輸送車両700に厚板が荷積みされた状態の一例を示す図である。輸送車両700の待機位置に設置されている構造物に第1の撮像装置430o~430pが取り付けられている。第1の撮像装置430o~430pの数および位置は、輸送車両700に荷積みされた厚板のステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域として可及的に多くの厚板の表示領域が撮像されるように設定される。また、輸送車両700にも第1の撮像装置430qが取り付けられている。第1の撮像装置430o~430qも、第1の撮像装置430a~430mと同様に、撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)を調整することが可能となっている。 FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which thick plates are loaded onto the transport vehicle 700. First imaging devices 430o to 430p are attached to a structure installed at a standby position of transport vehicle 700. The number and position of the first imaging devices 430o to 430p are such that as many display areas of the thick plates as possible can be imaged as the display area 201 of the thick plates loaded on the transportation vehicle 700 by the stencils and the display area of the labels 202. is set so that Furthermore, a first imaging device 430q is also attached to the transport vehicle 700. The first imaging devices 430o to 430q can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing.
 輸送車両700に荷積みされた厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430o~430qにより撮像される。 An area of the thick plate loaded on the transport vehicle 700, including the stencil display area 201, is imaged by the first imaging devices 430o to 430q.
<<工場内における搬送>>
 以上のようにして厚板が荷積みされた輸送車両700が工場に到着すると、輸送車両700から厚板が荷下ろしされる。輸送車両700に荷積みされた厚板は、不図示のクレーン等を用いて輸送車両700から荷下ろしされる。図7に示すように複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で同時に輸送車両700から荷下ろしされる場合がある。ただし、厚板が1枚ずつ輸送車両700から荷下ろしされる場合もある。また、輸送車両700から荷下ろしされる厚板の厚み、幅、および長さの少なくとも1つが異なる場合がある。また、図6A~図6Eに示したようにして厚板を搬送して輸送車両700から荷下ろしされてもよい。尚、輸送船400からガントリークレーン410の所定の置場に厚板を搬送する際に用いる搬送機器(ガントリークレーン410)と、輸送車両700から工場内の置場に厚板を搬送する際に用いる搬送機器(不図示のクレーン等)とは異なる搬送機器である。このように、或る搬送機器で或る置場に搬送された厚板は、当該或る搬送機器とは別の搬送機器で、当該或る搬送機器では搬送することができない別の置場に搬送される場合がある。このことは、工場内の各置場間等のその他の置場間において厚板を搬送する場合においても同じである。
<<Transportation within the factory>>
When the transport vehicle 700 loaded with thick plates as described above arrives at the factory, the thick plates are unloaded from the transport vehicle 700. The thick plates loaded onto the transport vehicle 700 are unloaded from the transport vehicle 700 using a crane or the like (not shown). As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of planks may be stacked and unloaded from a transportation vehicle 700 at the same time. However, the planks may be unloaded from the transportation vehicle 700 one by one. Furthermore, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks unloaded from transport vehicle 700 may be different. Alternatively, the plank may be transported and unloaded from the transportation vehicle 700 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E. Note that there is a transport device (gantry crane 410) used to transport the thick plate from the transport ship 400 to a predetermined storage location of the gantry crane 410, and a transport device used to transport the thick plate from the transport vehicle 700 to the storage location in the factory. (a crane, etc. not shown) is a different conveyance device. In this way, a plate transported to a certain storage site by a certain transport device is transported to another storage site, which cannot be transported by the certain transport device, by a transport device different from the certain transport device. There may be cases where The same is true when transporting thick plates between other storage areas, such as between storage areas within a factory.
 図9A~図9Cは、工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の様子の第1~第3の例を示す図である。工場内の置場に設置されている構造物に第1の撮像装置430r~430wが取り付けられている。図9A~図9Cに示すように、厚板は、工場内の置場に様々な態様で置かれる。そこで、第1の撮像装置430r~430wの数および位置は、置場に置かれた厚板のステンシルによる表示領域201およびラベル202による表示領域として可及的に多くの厚板の表示領域が撮像されるように設定される。第1の撮像装置430r~430wも、第1の撮像装置430a~430mと同様に、撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)を調整することが可能となっている。 FIGS. 9A to 9C are diagrams showing first to third examples of the appearance of thick plates placed in a storage area in a factory. First imaging devices 430r to 430w are attached to a structure installed in a storage area in a factory. As shown in FIGS. 9A-9C, planks are placed in various locations in a factory. Therefore, the number and position of the first imaging devices 430r to 430w are determined so that as many display areas of the thick plates as possible are imaged as the display area 201 of the stencils and the display area of the labels 202 of the thick plates placed in the storage area. is set to The first imaging devices 430r to 430w can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing.
 工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430r~430wにより撮像される。 The first imaging devices 430r to 430w image an area of a thick plate placed in a warehouse in a factory, including the stencil display area 201.
 厚板が入荷用の置場に置かれると、当該厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201(またはラベル202による表示領域)を含む領域が、前述したように第1の撮像装置430r~430wにより撮像される。 When the plank is placed in the receiving area, the area of the plank including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w as described above. Ru.
 その後、厚板は、生産設備に搬送される。図10は、生産設備で厚板が処理される様子の一例を示す図である。図10において生産設備1000は、例えば、熱処理を行うための設備、および、ガス切断を行うための設備である。図10では、搬送ロール1001を用いて厚板1002a、1002bが搬送される場合を例示する。尚、置場と搬送ロール1001との間の厚板の搬送は、不図示の搬送装置等を用いることにより実現される。 The plank is then transported to the production facility. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of how a thick plate is processed in a production facility. In FIG. 10, production equipment 1000 is, for example, equipment for heat treatment and equipment for gas cutting. In FIG. 10, a case where thick plates 1002a and 1002b are transported using a transport roll 1001 is illustrated. Note that conveyance of the thick plate between the storage area and the conveyance roll 1001 is realized by using a conveyance device (not shown) or the like.
 工場の生産ラインに設置されている構造物に第1の撮像装置430x~430yが取り付けられている。第1の撮像装置430x~430yの数および位置は、厚板1002a、1002bのステンシルによる表示領域201が撮像されるように設定される。第1の撮像装置430x~430yも、第1の撮像装置430a~430mと同様に、撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)を調整することが可能となっている。尚、搬送ロール1001上を搬送される厚板1002a、1002bは、重ねられることはないものとする。また、搬送ロール1001上の厚板1002a、1002bの搬送経路は、予め想定される。このため、本実施形態では、第1の撮像装置430x~430yにより、厚板1002a、1002bのラベル202による表示領域が撮像されないことはないものとする。ただし、第1の撮像装置を備える無人航空機を用いて、厚板1002a、1002bのラベル202による表示領域を撮像してもよい。尚、図10において、破線は、搬送ロール1001上の厚板1002a、1002bの搬送経路を示し、実在するものではない。 First imaging devices 430x to 430y are attached to a structure installed on a production line of a factory. The number and position of the first imaging devices 430x to 430y are set so that the display area 201 formed by the stencil of the thick plates 1002a, 1002b is imaged. The first imaging devices 430x to 430y can also adjust the imaging conditions (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number), etc.) in the same way as the first imaging devices 430a to 430m. ing. Note that the thick plates 1002a and 1002b transported on the transport roll 1001 are not overlapped. Moreover, the conveyance path of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b on the conveyance roll 1001 is assumed in advance. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the first imaging devices 430x to 430y do not fail to capture images of the display areas of the labels 202 of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b. However, the display area of the labels 202 of the planks 1002a and 1002b may be imaged using an unmanned aerial vehicle equipped with a first imaging device. In addition, in FIG. 10, the broken line shows the conveyance route of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b on the conveyance roll 1001, and does not actually exist.
 工場内の置場から搬送された厚板1002aは、搬送ロール1001に載せられ、搬送ロール1001により搬送される。生産設備1000に入る前に搬送ロール1001上を搬送中の厚板1002aの、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430xにより撮像される。また、生産設備1000において処理が終了して生産設備1000から出た後に、搬送ロール1001上を搬送中の厚板1002bの、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430yにより撮像される。 A thick plate 1002a transported from a storage area in a factory is placed on a transport roll 1001 and transported by the transport roll 1001. A region of the thick plate 1002a being transported on the transport rolls 1001 before entering the production facility 1000, including the stencil display region 201, is imaged by the first imaging device 430x. Further, after the processing in the production equipment 1000 is completed and the production equipment 1000 is exited, an area of the thick plate 1002b being transported on the transport rolls 1001, including the display area 201 by the stencil, is imaged by the first imaging device 430y. be done.
 その後、厚板は、倉庫内において、図9A~図9Cに例示するような置場に置かれる。前述したように、工場内の置場に置かれた厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201(またはラベル202による表示領域)を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430r~430wにより撮像される。出荷時においては、厚板は、倉庫から出荷用の置場に移動される。出荷用の置場に置かれた厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201(またはラベル202による表示領域)を含む領域が、第1の撮像装置430r~430wにより撮像される。 Thereafter, the planks are placed in a warehouse as illustrated in FIGS. 9A to 9C. As described above, the area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of a thick plate placed in a storage area in a factory is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w. During shipping, planks are moved from a warehouse to a shipping area. An area including the stencil display area 201 (or the label 202 display area) of the thick plate placed in the shipping area is imaged by the first imaging devices 430r to 430w.
 工場内の各置場においても、複数枚の厚板が積み重ねられた状態で置かれる場合がある。厚板が1枚ずつ工場内の各置場に置かれる場合もある。また、工場内の各置場に置かれる厚板の厚み、幅、および長さの少なくとも1つが異なる場合がある。 In each storage area within the factory, multiple planks may be stacked on top of each other. In some cases, one plate is placed in each storage area within the factory. Furthermore, at least one of the thickness, width, and length of the planks placed in each storage area within the factory may be different.
 図11は、元の厚板と、切断後の厚板の一例を示す図である。図11では、厚板1100が切断されて、厚板1110、1120、1130、1140が製造された場合を例示する。このようにして厚板1110、1120、1130、1140が製造された後、それぞれの厚板1110、1120、1130、1140に対して表示が施される。図11では、厚板1110、1120、1130、1140に対する表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141を示す。表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141には、厚板1110、1120、1130、1140のIDを含む情報が表示される。表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141には、例えば、ステンシルによる表示が行われる。ステンシルによる表示に加えて、刻印による表示およびラベルによる表示の少なくとも一方を行ってもよい。また、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141における表示は、手書きによる表示であってもよい。 FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the original thick plate and the thick plate after cutting. FIG. 11 illustrates a case where thick plate 1100 is cut to produce thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140. After the planks 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140 are manufactured in this manner, markings are applied to each plank 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140. In FIG. 11, display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, 1141 for planks 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140 are shown. Information including the IDs of the planks 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140 is displayed in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141. In the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141, display is performed using, for example, a stencil. In addition to the display using a stencil, at least one of a stamp and a label may be used. Furthermore, the display in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 may be handwritten.
 また、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141に、元の厚板1100のIDが表示されていてもよい。表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141には、例えば、ステンシルによる表示が行われる。ただし、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141における表示は、手書きによる表示であってもよい。このことは、表示領域201に対する表示や、ラベル202による表示についても同じである。以下では、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141は、ステンシルによる表示領域であるものとする。 Furthermore, the ID of the original thick plate 1100 may be displayed in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141. In the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141, display is performed using, for example, a stencil. However, the display in the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 may be handwritten. This also applies to the display on the display area 201 and the display on the label 202. In the following, it is assumed that display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 are display areas using stencils.
 厚板1110、1120、1130、1140が製造された場合、例えば、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置により、所望の厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141を含む領域の撮像画像を撮像してもよい。尚、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置は、例えば、第1の撮像装置を備える情報端末装置(タブレット端末やスマートフォン等)であってもよい。また、オペレータ(作業員)は、第1の撮像装置を備える無人航空機を操作して、所望の厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141を含む領域の撮像画像を、当該第1の撮像装置により撮像してもよい。 When the thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140 are manufactured, for example, the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 of the desired thick plates are displayed using a stencil using a first imaging device held by an operator (worker). A captured image of the area including the area may be captured. Note that the first imaging device held by the operator (worker) may be, for example, an information terminal device (tablet terminal, smartphone, etc.) including the first imaging device. Further, the operator (worker) operates the unmanned aerial vehicle equipped with the first imaging device to capture the captured image of the region of the desired thick plate including the stencil display regions 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141. The image may be captured by one imaging device.
 以上のように本実施形態では、少なくとも、輸送船400に置かれたときと、輸送船400から荷下ろしされ輸送車両700に荷積みされたときと、ガントリークレーン410および工場の各置場に置かれたときに、各厚板の、ステンシルによる表示領域201、1111、1121、1131、1141を含む領域、ラベル202による表示領域を含む領域の撮像画像が得られる場合を例示する。 As described above, in this embodiment, at least when placed on the transport ship 400, when unloaded from the transport ship 400 and loaded onto the transport vehicle 700, and at each storage area of the gantry crane 410 and the factory. A case will be exemplified in which a captured image of the area including the display areas 201, 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 by the stencils and the area including the display area by the label 202 of each thick plate is obtained.
 本実施形態では、以上のようにして撮像される撮像画像を用いて、物品管理装置により厚板の位置を自動的に特定する。尚、厚板が1枚ずつ搬送される場合には、ステンシルによる表示領域201を撮像することができるので、ラベル202による表示領域を含む領域の撮像画像は不要になる。以下の説明では、ステンシルによる表示およびラベル202による表示を総称する場合、必要に応じて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示と表記する。また、ステンシルによる表示領域201、1111、1121、1131、1141およびラベル202による表示領域を総称する場合、必要に応じて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域と表記する。 In this embodiment, the position of the plank is automatically specified by the article management device using the captured image captured as described above. Note that when the thick plates are transported one by one, the display area 201 by the stencil can be imaged, so the captured image of the area including the display area by the label 202 becomes unnecessary. In the following description, when stencil display and label 202 display are collectively referred to, they will be referred to as stencil (label) display as necessary. Furthermore, when the stencil display areas 201, 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 and the label 202 display area are collectively referred to as a stencil (label) display area, if necessary.
<物品管理装置>
 図12は、物品管理装置1200の機能的な構成の一例を示す図である。物品管理装置1200のハードウェアは、例えば、CPU、ROM、RAM、HDD、および各種のインターフェースを備える情報処理装置、または専用のハードウェアを用いることにより実現される。図13は、物品管理装置1200により管理される管理テーブル1300の一例を示す図である。なお、前述したように本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200によりトラッキングが行われる。したがって、本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、トラッキング装置となる。
<Articles management device>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200. The hardware of the article management device 1200 is realized by using, for example, an information processing device including a CPU, ROM, RAM, HDD, and various interfaces, or dedicated hardware. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a management table 1300 managed by the article management device 1200. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, tracking is performed by the article management device 1200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 becomes a tracking device.
 図12に示すように本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、第1の画像取得部1201と、認識部1202と、入手部1203と、照合部1204と、特定部1205と、位置導出部1206と、記憶部1207と、出力部1208と、第2の画像取得部1209と、を有する。 As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 includes a first image acquisition unit 1201, a recognition unit 1202, an acquisition unit 1203, a collation unit 1204, an identification unit 1205, and a position derivation unit 1206. , a storage unit 1207 , an output unit 1208 , and a second image acquisition unit 1209 .
 第1の画像取得部1201は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域を含む領域の第1の撮像画像を取得する。認識部1202は、第1の画像取得部1201で取得された第1の撮像画像から、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素、位置等を認識する。入手部1203は、後述する管理テーブル1300において現品表示の欄のIDの欄に記憶されている情報を入手する。照合部1204は、認識部1202で認識された情報と、入手部1203で入手された情報とを照合する。特定部1205は、照合部1204における照合の結果に基づいて、管理テーブル1300において管理されている厚板から1つの厚板を特定する。本実施形態では、厚板の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得部1210は、認識部1202、入手部1203、照合部1204、および特定部1205を有する。位置導出部1206は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域のx-y-z座標(三次元座標)を、特定部1205で特定された厚板の三次元位置として導出する。記憶部1207は、当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を管理テーブル1300に記憶する。出力部1208は、当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を出力する。第2の画像取得部1209は、位置導出部1206において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定するための第2の撮像画像を取得する。物品管理装置1200の詳細の一例については、図17のフローチャートを参照しながら後述する。 The first image acquisition unit 1201 acquires a first captured image of an area including a display area by a stencil (label). The recognition unit 1202 recognizes components, positions, etc. of display items in a stencil (label) display from the first captured image acquired by the first image acquisition unit 1201. The acquisition unit 1203 acquires information stored in the ID column of the actual item display column in the management table 1300, which will be described later. The collation unit 1204 collates the information recognized by the recognition unit 1202 and the information obtained by the acquisition unit 1203. The identification unit 1205 identifies one plank from among the planks managed in the management table 1300 based on the result of the verification performed by the verification unit 1204 . In this embodiment, an identification information acquisition unit 1210 that acquires identification information of a thick plate includes a recognition unit 1202, an acquisition unit 1203, a collation unit 1204, and a specification unit 1205. The position deriving unit 1206 derives the xyz coordinates (three-dimensional coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified by the specifying unit 1205. The storage unit 1207 stores information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate in the management table 1300. The output unit 1208 outputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate. The second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires a second captured image for specifying the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) in the position derivation unit 1206. A detailed example of the article management device 1200 will be described later with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.
 図13において、管理テーブル1300には、物品管理装置1200が厚板の位置を管理するために用いる情報が記憶される。管理テーブル1300に記憶される情報には、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報が含まれる。ただし、管理テーブル1300に記憶される情報の一部は、流通等においても活用できる情報であってもよい。ここで、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報とは厚板の製造メーカが設定または取得した情報である。厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報には、厚板の製造メーカの従業員であるオペレータが当該情報の意味を理解できる情報が含まれる。より具体的には、厚板の製造メーカで管理される情報は、例えば、厚板の製造メーカによって作成され、管理テーブル1300に記憶された情報である。本実施形態では、管理テーブル1300に記憶されている情報が、物品管理用データの一例であり、管理テーブル1300に各情報を格納することにより、物品管理用データのデータ構造の一例が実現される。 In FIG. 13, a management table 1300 stores information used by the article management device 1200 to manage the position of the plank. The information stored in the management table 1300 includes information managed by the thick plate manufacturer. However, some of the information stored in the management table 1300 may be information that can also be used in distribution and the like. Here, the information managed by the thick plate manufacturer is information set or acquired by the thick plate manufacturer. The information managed by the thick plate manufacturer includes information that allows an operator who is an employee of the thick plate manufacturer to understand the meaning of the information. More specifically, the information managed by the thick plate manufacturer is, for example, information created by the thick plate manufacturer and stored in the management table 1300. In this embodiment, the information stored in the management table 1300 is an example of article management data, and by storing each piece of information in the management table 1300, an example of the data structure of article management data is realized. .
 図13において、同一の列における情報が同一の厚板に対する識別情報になる(同一のNo.の下の欄は、同一の厚板に対する識別情報がそれぞれ記憶される欄になる)。
 図13において、現品表示の欄には、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示の各表示項目に関する情報が記憶される。非現品表示の欄には、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示の各表示項目に関する情報以外の情報が記憶される。本実施形態では、現品表示の欄に記憶される情報が物品管理用データに含まれる表示情報の一例であり、非現品表示の欄に記憶される情報が物品管理用データに含まれる非表示情報の一例である。
In FIG. 13, information in the same column becomes identification information for the same plank (columns under the same No. become columns in which identification information for the same plank is stored, respectively).
In FIG. 13, information regarding each display item of the stencil (label) display is stored in the actual item display column. The non-actual item display column stores information other than information regarding each display item displayed by a stencil (label). In the present embodiment, the information stored in the item display column is an example of display information included in article management data, and the information stored in the non-item item display column is hidden information included in article management data. This is an example.
 管理テーブル1300の現品表示の欄に記憶される情報の一例について説明する。
 現品表示の欄において、ステンシルの欄には、ステンシルに関する情報が記憶される。
 ステンシルの欄のIDの欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれるID305の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。尚、構成要素とは、文字、数字、記号、マーク等、表示項目を構成する個々の情報を指す。
 ステンシルの欄の需要家名の欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれる需要家名302の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
An example of information stored in the actual item display column of the management table 1300 will be explained.
In the stencil column of the actual product display column, information regarding the stencil is stored.
In the ID column of the stencil column, information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 305 included in the stencil display is stored. Note that the term "component element" refers to each piece of information that constitutes a display item, such as letters, numbers, symbols, and marks.
In the customer name column of the stencil column, information indicating the content and position of the constituent elements of the customer name 302 included in the stencil display is stored.
 ステンシルの欄のサイズの欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれるサイズ304の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 ステンシルの欄の規格の欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれる規格303の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 ステンシルの欄の需要家コードの欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれる需要家コード306の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
The size column of the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of size 304 included in the stencil display.
The standard column of the stencil column stores information indicating the contents and positions of the constituent elements of the standard 303 included in the stencil display.
The customer code column in the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of the customer code 306 included in the stencil display.
 ステンシルの欄の注文番号の欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれる注文番号307の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 以上のステンシルによる表示における表示項目の他に、ステンシルによる表示の表示項目として表示される可能性のある表示項目の内容も、管理テーブル1300に記憶される。図13のステンシルの欄の追加情報の欄の下の「・・・」は、このことを示す。また、表示項目自体は追加および/または削除されてもよい。
The order number column in the stencil column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of order number 307 included in the stencil display.
In addition to the display items in the stencil display described above, the contents of display items that may be displayed as display items in the stencil display are also stored in the management table 1300. The "..." below the additional information column in the stencil column in FIG. 13 indicates this. Furthermore, display items themselves may be added and/or deleted.
 現品表示の欄において、ラベルの欄には、ラベルに関する情報が記憶される。
 ラベルの欄のIDの欄には、ラベルによる表示に含まれるID312の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 ラベルの欄のサイズの欄には、ラベルによる表示に含まれるサイズ313の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
In the column of actual item display, information regarding the label is stored in the column of label.
In the ID column of the label column, information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 312 included in the label display is stored.
In the size column of the label column, information indicating the content and position of the component of size 313 included in the label display is stored.
 ラベルの欄の規格の欄には、ラベルによる表示に含まれる規格311の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 ラベルの欄の納期の欄には、ラベルによる表示に含まれる納期314の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 ラベルの欄の需要家コードの欄には、ラベルによる表示に含まれる需要家コード315の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。
The standard column of the label column stores information indicating the contents and positions of the constituent elements of the standard 311 included in the label display.
In the delivery date column of the label column, information indicating the content and position of the component of the delivery date 314 included in the label display is stored.
The customer code column in the label column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of the customer code 315 included in the label display.
 以上のラベルによる表示における表示項目の他に、ラベルによる表示の表示項目として表示される可能性のある表示項目の内容も、管理テーブル1300に記憶される。図13のラベルの欄の需要家コードの欄の下の「・・・」は、このことを示す。また、表示項目自体は追加および/または削除されてもよい。 In addition to the display items in the label display described above, the contents of display items that may be displayed as display items in the label display are also stored in the management table 1300. "..." below the customer code column in the label column of FIG. 13 indicates this. Furthermore, display items themselves may be added and/or deleted.
 次に、管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄に記憶される情報の一例について説明する。
 物品内位置の欄には、厚板における所定の位置を原点(基準)とした場合の表示領域の位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 物品内位置の欄のステンシルの欄には、厚板における所定の位置を原点(基準)とした場合の、ステンシルによる表示領域の位置を示す情報が記憶される。
 物品内位置の欄のラベルの欄には、厚板における所定の位置を原点(基準)とした場合の、ラベルによる表示領域の位置を示す情報が記憶される。
Next, an example of information stored in the non-product display column of the management table 1300 will be described.
Information indicating the position of the display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored in the column of position within the article.
In the stencil column of the intra-article position column, information indicating the position of the stencil display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored.
In the label column of the intra-article position column, information indicating the position of the label display area when a predetermined position on the thick plate is set as the origin (reference) is stored.
 物品位置の欄には、厚板の三次元位置を示す情報が記憶される。物品位置の欄に記憶される情報は、物品管理装置1200により特定された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報である。従って、物品管理装置1200により特定される同一の厚板の三次元位置は、厚板の移動に伴い、x座標およびy座標だけでなくz座標も変わる場合がある。よって、物品管理装置1200により特定される同一の厚板の情報表示位置の三次元位置も、厚板の移動に伴い、x座標およびy座標(水平面方向の位置)だけでなくz座標(高さ方向の位置)も変わる場合がある。 In the article position column, information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is stored. The information stored in the item position column is information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank specified by the item management device 1200. Therefore, the three-dimensional position of the same plank identified by the article management device 1200 may change not only the x-coordinate and y-coordinate but also the z-coordinate as the plank moves. Therefore, as the plank moves, the three-dimensional position of the information display position of the same plank identified by the article management device 1200 changes not only in the x and y coordinates (position in the horizontal direction) but also in the z coordinate (height). direction position) may also change.
 登録時刻の欄には、厚板が現在の位置に置かれた日時(日付と時刻とから定まるタイミング)を示す情報が記憶される。 The registered time column stores information indicating the date and time when the plank was placed at the current position (timing determined from the date and time).
 親IDの欄には、元の厚板のIDを示す情報が記憶される。工場において厚板が切断されることがある。元の厚板とは、切断前の厚板を指す。従って、親IDの欄に、元の厚板のIDを示す情報が記憶されている場合、当該親IDの欄と同一の列の欄に記憶されている情報は、切断後の厚板に対する情報になる。図11に示すようにして厚板1110、1120、1130、1140が製造された場合、管理テーブル1300において、当該厚板1110、1120、1130、1140に対する現品表示の欄には、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141に表示される表示項目の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。また、当該厚板1110、1120、1130、1140に対する親IDの欄には、厚板1100のIDを示す情報が記憶される。このように、本実施形態では、切断後の厚板の情報については、図13に示す管理テーブル1300において、新たな列(No)として管理される場合を例示する。管理テーブル1300において、現品表示および非現品表示の欄に、切断後の厚板に対する情報が記憶される。 Information indicating the ID of the original plank is stored in the parent ID column. Planks may be cut in a factory. Original plank refers to the plank before cutting. Therefore, if information indicating the ID of the original plank is stored in the parent ID column, the information stored in the column in the same column as the parent ID column is the information for the plank after cutting. become. When thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140 are manufactured as shown in FIG. , 1131, and 1141 are stored. Furthermore, information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1100 is stored in the parent ID column for the thick plates 1110, 1120, 1130, and 1140. As described above, in this embodiment, the information on the thick plate after cutting is exemplified as being managed as a new column (No) in the management table 1300 shown in FIG. 13. In the management table 1300, information regarding the thick plate after cutting is stored in the actual item display and non-actual item display columns.
 ここで、例えば、厚板1110が切断されて更に別の複数の厚板が製造される場合がある。この場合、当該別の複数の厚板に対する親IDの欄には、厚板1110のIDを示す情報が記憶される。厚板1110に対する親IDの欄には、厚板1100のIDを示す情報が記憶されている。このように、親IDの欄に記憶されている情報をたどることにより、各厚板の変遷を特定することができる。このようにして或る厚板について、親IDの欄に記憶されている情報をたどることにより得られる厚板の並びを、当該厚板の切り板系列と称することとする。例えば、厚板1110の切り板系列は、厚板1100、1110となる。また、各厚板の親IDの欄には、例えば、その切り板系列が分かるように、直近の厚板のIDを示す情報だけでなく、その切り系列に属する全ての厚板のIDを示す情報が記憶されていてもよい。この場合、何れのIDも製造メーカにおいて定義されたものが用いられる。 Here, for example, the plank 1110 may be cut to produce a plurality of additional planks. In this case, information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1110 is stored in the parent ID column for the other plurality of thick plates. In the parent ID column for the thick plate 1110, information indicating the ID of the thick plate 1100 is stored. In this way, by tracing the information stored in the parent ID column, the changes in each plank can be identified. The sequence of planks obtained by tracing the information stored in the parent ID column for a certain plank in this manner will be referred to as the cut plate series of the plank. For example, the cut plate series of plank 1110 becomes planks 1100 and 1110. In addition, in the parent ID column of each plank, for example, in order to know the cutting board series, not only information indicating the ID of the most recent plank but also the IDs of all planks belonging to that cutting series are shown. Information may also be stored. In this case, any ID defined by the manufacturer is used.
 運搬具IDの欄には、厚板の運搬具のIDが記憶される。本実施形態では、運搬具が、輸送船400および輸送車両700である場合を例示する。
 厚板が輸送船400に荷積みされると、物品管理装置1200は、例えば、以下のようにして輸送船400のIDを示す情報を記憶してもよい。
 まず、物品管理装置1200は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送船400のID(いわゆる船番)を取得する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、管理テーブル1300のIDの欄から、取得した厚板のIDと同じIDを示す情報が記憶されている列を特定する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、特定した列の運搬具IDの欄に、取得した輸送船400のIDを示す情報を記憶する。
The ID of the thick plate carrier is stored in the column of carrier ID. In this embodiment, a case is illustrated in which the carriers are a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700.
When the planks are loaded onto the transport ship 400, the article management device 1200 may store information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400, for example, as follows.
First, the article management device 1200 acquires the ID of the plank and the ID (so-called ship number) of the transport ship 400. Then, the article management device 1200 identifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the article management device 1200 stores information indicating the acquired ID of the transport ship 400 in the vehicle ID column of the specified column.
 例えば、第1の撮像装置430a、430b、430nにより、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域と、輸送船400のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域とを含む撮像画像を撮像してもよい。このようにする場合、物品管理装置1200は、当該撮像画像から、厚板のIDと輸送船400のIDとを認識して取得してもよい。 For example, the first imaging devices 430a, 430b, and 430n capture an image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. Good too. In this case, the article management device 1200 may recognize and acquire the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400 from the captured image.
 また、第1の撮像装置430a、430b、430nにより、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像と、輸送船400のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像とを撮像してもよい。例えば、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像の次に、輸送船400のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像が撮像されるものとしてもよい。このようにする場合、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像から認識されるIDと、輸送船400のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像から認識されるIDとを、厚板のIDと輸送船400のIDとして取得してもよい。 Furthermore, the first imaging devices 430a, 430b, and 430n capture a captured image including a display area 201 using a stencil or a display area using a label 202, and a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. may be imaged. For example, a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed may be captured next to the captured image including the display area 201 by the stencil or the display area by the label 202. In this case, the article management device 1200 includes an ID recognized from a captured image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transport ship 400 is displayed. The ID recognized from the captured image may be acquired as the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400.
 また、例えば、輸送船400のオペレータ(作業員)が、手持ちの情報処理端末(タブレット端末等)に厚板のIDと輸送船400のIDとを入力してもよい。このようにする場合、当該情報処理端末から物品管理装置1200に、厚板のIDと輸送船400のIDとを送信することで、物品管理装置1200が、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送船400のIDとを取得してもよい。 Furthermore, for example, the operator (worker) of the transport ship 400 may input the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.). In this case, by transmitting the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400 from the information processing terminal to the goods management device 1200, the goods management device 1200 can send the ID of the plank and the ID of the transport ship 400. You may also obtain the ID of
 また、厚板が輸送車両700に荷積みされると、物品管理装置1200は、例えば、以下のようにして輸送車両700のIDを示す情報を記憶してもよい。
 まず、物品管理装置1200は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送車両700のID(例えば、ナンバープレートの情報)を取得する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、管理テーブル1300のIDの欄から、取得した厚板のIDと同じIDを示す情報が記憶されている列を特定する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、特定した列の運搬具IDの欄に、取得した輸送車両700のIDを示す情報を記憶する。
Further, when the planks are loaded onto the transportation vehicle 700, the article management device 1200 may store information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700, for example, as follows.
First, the article management device 1200 acquires the ID of the plank and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 (for example, license plate information). Then, the article management device 1200 identifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the article management device 1200 stores information indicating the acquired ID of the transport vehicle 700 in the column of the vehicle ID of the specified column.
 例えば、第1の撮像装置430o~430qにより、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域と、輸送車両700のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域とを含む撮像画像を撮像してもよい。このようにする場合、物品管理装置1200は、当該撮像画像から、厚板のIDと輸送車両700のIDとを認識して取得してもよい。 For example, the first imaging devices 430o to 430q may capture an image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed. . In this case, the article management device 1200 may recognize and acquire the ID of the thick plate and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 from the captured image.
 また、第1の撮像装置430o~430qにより、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像と、輸送車両700のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像とを撮像してもよい。例えば、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像の次に、輸送車両700のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像が撮像されるものとしてもよい。このようにする場合、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシルによる表示領域201またはラベル202による表示領域を含む撮像画像から認識されるIDと、輸送車両700のIDを示す情報が表示されている領域を含む撮像画像から認識されるIDとを、厚板のIDと輸送車両700のIDとして取得してもよい。 Furthermore, the first imaging devices 430o to 430q capture a captured image including the stencil display area 201 or the label 202 display area, and a captured image including the area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed. You may. For example, a captured image including an area where information indicating the ID of the transport vehicle 700 is displayed may be captured next to the captured image including the display area 201 by the stencil or the display area by the label 202. In this case, the article management device 1200 includes an ID recognized from a captured image including a stencil display area 201 or a label 202 display area, and an area where information indicating the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 is displayed. The ID recognized from the captured image may be acquired as the ID of the thick plate and the ID of the transport vehicle 700.
 また、例えば、輸送車両700のオペレータ(作業員)が、手持ちの情報処理端末(タブレット端末等)に厚板のIDと輸送車両700のIDとを入力してもよい。このようにする場合、当該情報処理端末から物品管理装置1200に、厚板のIDと輸送車両700のIDとを送信することで、物品管理装置1200が、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送車両700のIDとを取得してもよい。 Furthermore, for example, the operator (worker) of the transportation vehicle 700 may input the ID of the plank and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.). In this case, by transmitting the ID of the thick plate and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700 from the information processing terminal to the article management device 1200, the article management device 1200 can send the ID of the plate and the ID of the transportation vehicle 700. You may also obtain the ID of
 管理テーブル1300のデータ構造は、管理テーブル1300の各欄に記憶される情報(例えば、物品位置および登録時刻)が、厚板が新たな位置に置かれる度に、情報が更新されるデータ構造でもよい。また、管理テーブル1300のデータ構造は、情報が追加されるデータ構造でもよい。後者の場合、物品の位置の履歴を追うことができる利点を有する。 The data structure of the management table 1300 may be such that the information stored in each column of the management table 1300 (for example, article position and registration time) is updated every time a plank is placed in a new position. good. Further, the data structure of the management table 1300 may be a data structure to which information is added. In the latter case, there is an advantage that the history of the position of the article can be tracked.
 次に、管理テーブル1300の現品表示の欄に記憶される内容と、非現品表示の欄の物品内位置の欄に記憶される内容の一例を、より具体的に説明する。
 図14は、ステンシルの物品内位置と、ステンシルによる表示における各表示項目の構成要素の位置の一例を示す図である。図14では、図2に示す表示位置および図3Aに示す内容で、ステンシルによる表示がなされている場合を例示する。
 図14では、直方体の厚板の8つの頂点のうち、図2に示す頂点203を原点とし、当該頂点203から、厚板の幅方向に沿う方向をy軸の正の方向、厚板の長さ方向に沿う方向をx軸の正の方向とするx-y座標で、ステンシルの物品内位置と、ステンシルによる各表示項目の構成要素の位置とを表す。
Next, an example of the contents stored in the actual item display column of the management table 1300 and the content stored in the intra-article position column of the non-actual item display column will be explained in more detail.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display using the stencil. FIG. 14 illustrates a case in which stencil display is performed with the display position shown in FIG. 2 and the content shown in FIG. 3A.
In FIG. 14, among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate, the vertex 203 shown in FIG. The position of the stencil in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item by the stencil are expressed in xy coordinates with the direction along the horizontal direction being the positive direction of the x-axis.
 本実施形態では、ステンシルによる表示における各表示項目の構成要素の位置のうち、x軸の最大値、x軸の最小値、y軸の最大値、およびy軸の最小値となる位置により定まる外接矩形の4つ頂点のうち、対角線上にある2つの頂点のx-y座標を、ステンシルの物品内位置とする。図14では、外接矩形の2つの頂点1401a、1401bのx-y座標(Ls10,Ws10)、(Ls11,Ws11)が、ステンシルの物品内位置であることを示す。尚、ここでは説明を簡単にするため、外接矩形は、物品内位置を表現する座標軸(図14に示す例ではx軸およびy軸)に平行な矩形であるものとする。 In this embodiment, the circumference determined by the position of the maximum value of the x-axis, the minimum value of the x-axis, the maximum value of the y-axis, and the minimum value of the y-axis among the positions of the constituent elements of each display item in the stencil display. Among the four vertices of the rectangle, the xy coordinates of two vertices on the diagonal are defined as the position of the stencil in the article. In FIG. 14, the xy coordinates (Ls10, Ws10) and (Ls11, Ws11) of the two vertices 1401a and 1401b of the circumscribed rectangle indicate the position of the stencil within the article. In order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed here that the circumscribed rectangle is a rectangle parallel to the coordinate axes (x-axis and y-axis in the example shown in FIG. 14) expressing the position within the article.
 また、ステンシルによる表示おける各表示項目の構成要素(文字、数字、記号、マーク)の重心(または図心)の位置のx-y座標を、当該構成要素の位置とする。図14では、ステンシルによる表示に含まれるID305の構成要素である5、6、3、4、9、7、-、0、1のy軸座標が、それぞれ、Ws1、Ws2、Ws3、Ws4、Ws5、Ws6、Ws7、Ws8、Ws9であり、x軸座標が、何れもLs1であることを示す。
 以上のようにしてステンシルによる表示の各表示項目の各構成要素の位置がx-y座標で表される。
In addition, the xy coordinates of the center of gravity (or centroid) of each component (letter, number, symbol, mark) of each display item in the stencil display is taken as the position of the component. In FIG. 14, the y-axis coordinates of 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, and 1, which are the components of ID 305 included in the stencil display, are Ws1, Ws2, Ws3, Ws4, and Ws5, respectively. , Ws6, Ws7, Ws8, and Ws9, indicating that the x-axis coordinates are all Ls1.
As described above, the position of each component of each display item displayed by the stencil is expressed by xy coordinates.
 図15は、ラベルの物品内位置と、ラベルによる表示における各表示項目の構成要素の位置の一例を示す図である。図15では、図2に示す表示位置および図3Bに示す表示内容で、ラベルによる表示が行われている場合を例示する。
 図15では、直方体の厚板の8つの頂点のうち、図2に示す頂点204を原点とし、当該頂点204から、厚板の幅方向に沿う方向をy軸の正の方向、厚板の板厚方向に沿う方向をz軸の正の方向とするy-z座標で、ラベルの物品内位置と、ラベルによる各表示項目の構成要素の位置とを表す。
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the position of the label in the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item in the display by the label. FIG. 15 illustrates a case in which labels are displayed in the display position shown in FIG. 2 and the display content shown in FIG. 3B.
In FIG. 15, among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate, the vertex 204 shown in FIG. The position of the label within the article and the position of the constituent elements of each display item on the label are expressed in yz coordinates, with the direction along the thickness direction being the positive direction of the z-axis.
 本実施形態では、ラベルが矩形状であるものとする。ラベルの4つの頂点のうち、対角線上にある2つの頂点のy-z座標を、ラベルの物品内位置とする。また、ラベルによる表示おける各表示項目の構成要素の重心(または図心)の位置のy-z座標を、当該構成要素の位置とする。図15では、ラベルの2つの頂点1501a、1501bのy-z座標が、ラベルの物品内位置であることを示す。 In this embodiment, it is assumed that the label is rectangular. Among the four vertices of the label, the yz coordinates of two diagonal vertices are taken as the position of the label within the article. Furthermore, the yz coordinates of the position of the center of gravity (or centroid) of the component of each display item in the label display is taken as the position of the component. In FIG. 15, the yz coordinates of the two vertices 1501a and 1501b of the label indicate the position of the label within the article.
 前述したように、図13に示す管理テーブル1300において、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄のIDの欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれるID305の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。従って、図16Aに示すように、図14に示す例では、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄のIDの欄には、ステンシルによる表示に含まれるID305の構成要素の内容として、「5」、「6」、「3」、「4」、「9」、「7」、「-」、「0」、「1」が記憶される。また、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄のIDの欄には、当該構成要素の位置として、(Ls1,Ws1)、(Ls2,Ws1)、(Ls3,Ws1)、(Ls4,Ws1)、(Ls5,Ws1)、(Ls6,Ws1)、(Ls7,Ws1)、(Ls8,Ws1)、(Ls9,Ws1)が記憶される。 As described above, in the management table 1300 shown in FIG. 13, the ID column of the stencil column of the actual product display column stores information indicating the content and position of the component of ID 305 included in the stencil display. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the example shown in FIG. 14, the ID column of the stencil column of the actual item display column contains "5", " 6'', ``3'', ``4'', ``9'', ``7'', ``-'', ``0'', and ``1'' are stored. In addition, in the ID column of the stencil column of the actual item display column, the positions of the relevant components are (Ls1, Ws1), (Ls2, Ws1), (Ls3, Ws1), (Ls4, Ws1), (Ls5 , Ws1), (Ls6, Ws1), (Ls7, Ws1), (Ls8, Ws1), and (Ls9, Ws1) are stored.
 現品表示の欄のその他の表示項目の欄にも、ステンシルの欄のIDの欄と同様に、当該表示項目の構成要素の内容および位置を示す情報が記憶される。尚、ラベルの欄の各表示項目の構成要素の位置を示す情報は、x-y座標ではなく、y-z座標となる。 Similarly to the ID column of the stencil column, information indicating the content and position of the component of the display item is stored in the other display item column of the actual item display column. Note that the information indicating the position of the component of each display item in the label column is not the xy coordinate but the yz coordinate.
 また、図16Bに示すように、図14に示す例では、非現品表示の欄の物品内位置の欄のステンシルの欄には、ステンシルの物品内位置を示す情報として、(Ls10,Ws10)、(Ls11,Ws11)が記憶される。
 物品内位置の欄のラベルの欄にも、物品内位置の欄のステンシルの欄と同様に、ラベルの物品内位置を示す情報が記憶される。尚、前述したように、ラベルの物品内位置を示す情報は、x-y座標ではなく、y-z座標となる。
In addition, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the example shown in FIG. 14, the stencil column in the column for position within the article in the column for displaying non-actual items includes (Ls10, Ws10), as information indicating the position of the stencil within the article. (Ls11, Ws11) is stored.
Similarly to the stencil column of the intra-article position column, information indicating the position of the label within the article is also stored in the label column of the intra-article position column. Note that, as described above, the information indicating the position of the label within the article is not the xy coordinate but the yz coordinate.
 管理テーブル1300を作成するに際し、例えば、オペレータは、物品管理装置1200のユーザインターフェースを操作して、管理テーブル1300の各欄に記憶すべき情報を、物品管理装置1200に入力してもよい。また、物品管理装置1200は、工場の操業を管理するコンピュータ等の外部装置から、管理テーブル1300の各欄に記憶すべき情報を受信してもよい。 When creating the management table 1300, for example, the operator may operate the user interface of the article management device 1200 to input information to be stored in each column of the management table 1300 into the article management device 1200. Additionally, the article management device 1200 may receive information to be stored in each column of the management table 1300 from an external device such as a computer that manages factory operations.
 管理テーブル1300の現品表示の欄に記憶される情報と、非現品表示の欄の物品内位置および親IDの欄に記憶される情報は、厚板に対する表示が行われた後に定められる場合もあれば、厚板に対する表示が行われる前に定められている場合もある。従って、当該欄に記憶すべき情報が厚板に対する表示が行われる前に定められている場合には、物品管理装置1200は、例えば、前述したようにして当該欄に記憶すべき情報を取得して、管理テーブル1300の各欄に記憶する。 The information stored in the item display column of the management table 1300 and the information stored in the item position and parent ID column of the non-item item display column may be determined after the display on the thick plate is performed. For example, in some cases, the requirements are determined before the marking is applied to the plank. Therefore, if the information to be stored in the column is determined before displaying on the plank, the article management device 1200, for example, acquires the information to be stored in the column as described above. and stored in each column of the management table 1300.
 一方、非現品表示の欄の物品位置および登録時刻の欄に記憶される情報は、厚板に対する表示が行われる前に定めることができない場合がある。従って、物品管理装置1200は、例えば、当該欄に記憶すべき情報が得られたタイミングで、当該欄に記憶すべき情報を取得して、管理テーブル1300の各欄に記憶する。前述したように登録時刻の欄には、物品位置の欄に記憶される情報が変更された日時が記憶される。この場合、厚板が現在の位置に置かれた日時が登録時刻の欄に登録される。 On the other hand, the information stored in the item position and registration time columns of the non-actual product display column may not be determined before the display on the plank is performed. Therefore, the article management device 1200 acquires the information to be stored in the relevant column and stores it in each column of the management table 1300, for example, at the timing when the information to be stored in the relevant column is obtained. As described above, the registration time column stores the date and time when the information stored in the article position column was changed. In this case, the date and time when the plank was placed at the current position is registered in the registration time column.
 尚、非現品表示の欄の項目について、当該項目の情報が取得されている場合に限り、当該項目の欄に情報が記憶され、当該項目の情報が取得されていない場合には、当該項目の欄に情報は記憶されない。また、登録時刻の欄に記憶されている日時から所定時間が経過しても物品位置の欄に記憶されている情報が更新されない場合、物品管理装置1200は、厚板の位置の特定が途絶えたと判断し、当該物品位置および登録時刻の欄に記憶されている情報をリセットするのが好ましい。また、同一の位置において、登録時刻の欄に記憶されている日時が早い厚板が、登録時刻の欄に記憶されている日時が遅い厚板よりも先に搬送されることはない(即ち、板の重なりがある場合、下にある板が突然なくなることはない)。このため、物品管理装置1200は、物品位置および登録時刻の欄に記憶されている情報のリセットを実行するに際し、以下のようにするのが好ましい。即ち、物品管理装置1200は、リセットする登録時刻の欄に記載されている日時よりも遅い日時が登録時刻の欄に記憶されている厚板であって、リセットする物品位置の欄に記憶されている三次元位置と同じ三次元位置の厚板がある場合、アラーム等で確認をするサインを出すことが望ましい。 Regarding items in the non-actual item display column, information is stored in the column for the item only if the information for the item has been acquired, and if the information for the item has not been acquired, the information for the item is stored in the column for the item. No information is stored in the field. Furthermore, if the information stored in the article position column is not updated even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the date and time stored in the registration time column, the article management device 1200 determines that the identification of the position of the plank has been interrupted. It is preferable to make a judgment and reset the information stored in the columns of the article position and registration time. Furthermore, at the same position, a plank with an earlier date and time stored in the registered time column will not be transported before a plank with a later date and time stored in the registered time column (i.e., If there are overlapping boards, the board below will not suddenly disappear). Therefore, when the article management device 1200 resets the information stored in the article position and registration time columns, it is preferable to do the following. In other words, the article management device 1200 determines whether a plank whose date and time is later than the date and time written in the column of registered time to be reset is stored in the column of registered time, and which is stored in the column of article position to be reset. If there is a plank in the same three-dimensional position as the current position, it is desirable to issue a sign to confirm it with an alarm or the like.
 次に、物品管理装置1200の機能の一例を説明する。図17は、本実施形態の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートである。図17を参照しながら、物品管理装置1200の機能の一例を説明する。なお、前述したように本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200によりトラッキングが行われる。したがって、本実施形態では、図17で例示するフローチャートを用いて実現される物品管理方法は、トラッキング方法となる。 Next, an example of the functions of the article management device 1200 will be explained. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment. An example of the functions of the article management device 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, tracking is performed by the article management device 1200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the article management method implemented using the flowchart illustrated in FIG. 17 is a tracking method.
 図17のステップS1701において、第1の画像取得部1201は、第1の撮像画像を取得する。第1の撮像画像は、第1の撮像装置430a~430y、無人航空機440a~440cが備える第1の撮像装置、およびオペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置のうち、何れか1つの第1の撮像装置で撮像された撮像画像である。第1の撮像画像は、第1の撮像装置から物品管理装置1200に直接送信されても、情報端末装置を介して第1の撮像装置から物品管理装置1200に送信されてもよい。図17のフローチャートによる処理は、第1の撮像装置430a~430y、無人航空機440a~440cが備える第1の撮像装置、およびオペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置のうち、何れか1つの撮像装置で撮像された撮像画像が物品管理装置1200で受信される度に実行される。本実施形態では、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置のIDと、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した際の撮像条件とが、第1の撮像画像と共に送信されるものとする。 In step S1701 of FIG. 17, the first image acquisition unit 1201 acquires the first captured image. The first captured image is captured by any one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430y, the first imaging devices included in the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, and the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). This is a captured image captured by the first imaging device. The first captured image may be directly transmitted from the first imaging device to the article management device 1200, or may be transmitted from the first imaging device to the article management device 1200 via an information terminal device. The process according to the flowchart in FIG. 17 is performed on any one of the first imaging devices 430a to 430y, the first imaging devices included in the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, and the first imaging device held by the operator (worker). This process is executed every time the article management device 1200 receives a captured image captured by one imaging device. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the ID of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image and the imaging conditions under which the first captured image was captured are transmitted together with the first captured image. .
 第1の画像取得部1201は、第1の撮像画像と共に、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置のIDと、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した際の撮像条件と、当該第1の撮像画像の撮像日時と、を取得する。撮像条件には、撮像の際に撮像装置で設定される情報のうち、後述するようにしてステンシルによる表示領域またはラベルによる表示領域の位置を特定するために必要となる情報が含まれる。 The first image acquisition unit 1201 includes the first captured image, the ID of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image, the imaging conditions under which the first captured image was captured, and the The imaging date and time of the first captured image are acquired. Among the information set by the imaging device during image capturing, the imaging conditions include information necessary for specifying the position of the stencil display area or the label display area, as will be described later.
 また、第1の撮像画像を撮像したときの第1の撮像装置の位置が固定されていない場合、第1の撮像画像を撮像したときの第1の撮像装置の位置情報が、第1の撮像画像と共に送信される。例えば、無人航空機440a~440cが、GPS(Global Positioning System)を用いて、当該無人航空機の三次元座標(x-y-z座標)を測位することができる場合、当該無人航空機が備える第1の撮像装置の位置情報として、当該三次元座標が送信されるようにしてもよい。輸送船400に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430n、荷役装置411に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430g~430m、および輸送車両700に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430qについても、無人航空機440a~440cと同様にして、当該第1の撮像装置の位置情報が第1の撮像画像と共に送信されるようにしてもよい。このことは、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置についても同じである。
 尚、第1の撮像装置が、第1の撮像画像に含めるべき領域を撮像することができない場合、ステップS1701の処理に先立って、第1の撮像装置の撮像条件(撮像方向、画角、ズーム倍率、および絞り(F値)等)が調整される。
Further, if the position of the first imaging device when the first captured image is captured is not fixed, the position information of the first imaging device when the first captured image is captured is Sent with the image. For example, if the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c can position the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the unmanned aerial vehicle using GPS (Global Positioning System), the first The three-dimensional coordinates may be transmitted as the position information of the imaging device. Regarding the first imaging device 430n attached to the transport ship 400, the first imaging devices 430g to 430m attached to the cargo handling device 411, and the first imaging device 430q attached to the transportation vehicle 700, Similarly to the unmanned aerial vehicles 440a to 440c, the position information of the first imaging device may be transmitted together with the first captured image. This also applies to the first imaging device held by the operator (worker).
Note that if the first imaging device is unable to capture an area that should be included in the first captured image, the imaging conditions of the first imaging device (imaging direction, angle of view, zoom magnification, aperture (F number, etc.) are adjusted.
 次に、ステップS1702において、認識部1202は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像から、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素(文字、数字、記号、マーク)を認識する。表示項目の構成要素の内容を認識する処理は、例えば、公知のOCR(Optical character recognition)を用いた技術で実現することができるので、ここでは、その詳細な説明を省略する。尚、NN(Neural Network)等のAI(Artificial Intelligence)を用いた技術や、AIとOCRとを組み合わせた技術(いわゆるAI OCR)を用いて、ステップS1702の処理を実現してもよい。 Next, in step S1702, the recognition unit 1202 recognizes the constituent elements (letters, numbers, symbols, marks) of display items in the stencil (label) display from the first captured image acquired in step S1701. The process of recognizing the contents of the constituent elements of the display items can be realized, for example, by a technique using well-known OCR (Optical Character Recognition), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here. Note that the process in step S1702 may be realized using a technology using AI (Artificial Intelligence) such as NN (Neural Network) or a technology that combines AI and OCR (so-called AI OCR).
 また、認識部1202は、表示項目の構成要素が、ステンシルによる表示とラベルによる表示との何れのものであるのかを特定する。例えば、認識部1202は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像に基づいてエッジ検出処理を行い、厚板のエッジを検出し、検出した結果に基づいて、厚板の領域を特定する。そして、認識部1202は、特定した領域が、厚板の板面部分と厚板の側面(板厚)部分との何れであるかを判定する。この判定は、例えば、特定した領域の縦横比に基づいて実現される。この判定の結果、特定した領域が、厚板の板面部分である場合、認識部1202は、表示項目の構成要素が、ステンシルによる表示のものであると認識する。一方、特定した領域が、厚板の側面(板厚)部分である場合、認識部1202は、表示項目の構成要素が、ラベルによる表示のものであると認識する。 Furthermore, the recognition unit 1202 identifies whether the component of the display item is displayed by a stencil or displayed by a label. For example, the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image acquired in step S1701, detects the edge of the thick plate, and identifies the area of the thick plate based on the detected result. Then, the recognition unit 1202 determines whether the identified region is a plate surface portion of the thick plate or a side surface (plate thickness) portion of the thick plate. This determination is realized, for example, based on the aspect ratio of the specified area. As a result of this determination, if the identified area is a plate surface portion of a thick plate, the recognition unit 1202 recognizes that the component of the display item is displayed by a stencil. On the other hand, if the identified area is the side surface (thickness) of a thick plate, the recognition unit 1202 recognizes that the component of the display item is displayed by a label.
 また、認識部1202は、第1の撮像画像に基づいてエッジ検出処理を行い、矩形状のラベル202の領域が検出された場合に、表示項目の構成要素が、ラベルによる表示のものであると認識し、そうでない場合に、表示項目の構成要素が、ステンシルによる表示のものであると認識してもよい。
 尚、本実施形態では、説明を簡単にするために、最上段にある厚板については、第1の撮像画像には、ラベル202による表示領域ではなくステンシルによる表示領域201が含まれるものとする。
Further, the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image, and if the area of the rectangular label 202 is detected, the recognition unit 1202 determines that the component of the display item is displayed by the label. If this is not the case, the component of the displayed item may be recognized as being displayed using a stencil.
In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that for the thick plate located at the top level, the first captured image includes a display area 201 using a stencil instead of a display area using a label 202. .
 また、認識部1202は、表示項目の位置を導出する。第1の認識部1202が表示項目の位置を導出する手法の一例を説明する。まず、認識部1202は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像に基づいてエッジ検出処理を行い、厚板のエッジを検出する。そして、認識部1202は、第1の撮像画像における物品内位置の原点(厚板における所定の位置)を検出する。認識部1202は、例えば、直方体の厚板の8つの頂点のうち、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域と物品内位置の原点との位置関係として予め設定された位置関係に基づいて、撮像画像における物品内位置の原点(厚板における所定の位置)となる頂点を導出する。 Additionally, the recognition unit 1202 derives the position of the display item. An example of a method by which the first recognition unit 1202 derives the position of a display item will be described. First, the recognition unit 1202 performs edge detection processing based on the first captured image acquired in step S1701 to detect edges of the thick plate. Then, the recognition unit 1202 detects the origin of the position within the article (predetermined position on the thick plate) in the first captured image. For example, the recognition unit 1202 identifies the article in the captured image based on a preset positional relationship between the display area of the stencil (label) and the origin of the position within the article among the eight vertices of a rectangular parallelepiped thick plate. Derive the vertex that is the origin of the internal position (predetermined position on the thick plate).
 ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域と物品内位置の原点との位置関係として、例えば、以下のような情報が物品管理装置1200に予め設定されていてもよい。即ち、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示の表示項目の構成要素を、当該構成要素の頂部が上側に位置するように見た場合に、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示と同一面において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示の右下側に位置する頂点が、物品内位置の原点であるという情報が物品管理装置1200に予め設定されていてもよい。認識部1202は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素の位置として、撮像画像における物品内位置の原点を基準とする位置を導出する。ステップS1702の処理が終了すると、ステップS1703の処理が実行される。 For example, the following information may be preset in the article management device 1200 as the positional relationship between the display area of the stencil (label) and the origin of the position within the article. In other words, when the component of the display item of the stencil (label) display is viewed so that the top of the component is located on the upper side, the stencil (label) display is on the same surface as the stencil (label) display. Information that the vertex located on the lower right side of is the origin of the position within the article may be set in advance in the article management device 1200. The recognition unit 1202 derives the position of the component of the display item in the stencil (label) display based on the origin of the position within the article in the captured image. When the process in step S1702 is completed, the process in step S1703 is executed.
 ステップS1703において、入手部1203は、記憶部1207に記憶されている管理テーブル1300において現品表示の欄のIDの欄に記憶されている情報を入手する。
 次に、ステップS1704において、照合部1204は、ステップS1702において認識された情報と、ステップS1703において入手された情報とを照合する。ステップS1702において認識された情報が、ステンシルによる表示の情報であると認識された場合、照合部1204は、ステップS1703において入手された情報のうち、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄のIDの欄に記憶されている情報と、ステップS1702において認識された情報とを照合する。一方、ステップS1702において認識された情報が、ラベルによる表示の情報であると認識された場合、照合部1204は、ステップS1703において入手された情報のうち、現品表示の欄のラベルの欄のIDの欄に記憶されている情報と、ステップS1702において認識された情報とを照合する。
In step S1703, the acquisition unit 1203 acquires information stored in the ID column of the actual item display column in the management table 1300 stored in the storage unit 1207.
Next, in step S1704, the matching unit 1204 matches the information recognized in step S1702 and the information obtained in step S1703. If the information recognized in step S1702 is recognized as stencil display information, the collation unit 1204 selects the ID column of the stencil column of the actual product display column of the information obtained in step S1703. The stored information is compared with the information recognized in step S1702. On the other hand, if the information recognized in step S1702 is recognized as label display information, the collation unit 1204 checks the ID in the label column of the actual product display column among the information obtained in step S1703. The information stored in the column is compared with the information recognized in step S1702.
 次に、ステップS1705において、特定部1205は、ステップS1703の照合の結果に基づいて、管理テーブル1300において管理されている厚板から1つの厚板を特定する。具体的に、特定部1205は、ステップS1703において入手された情報の中から、ステップS1702において認識された情報と一致する情報を特定する。 Next, in step S1705, the identification unit 1205 identifies one plank from the planks managed in the management table 1300, based on the result of the verification in step S1703. Specifically, the identifying unit 1205 identifies information that matches the information recognized in step S1702 from among the information obtained in step S1703.
 ここで、一致とは、ステップS1702で認識された情報に、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄またはラベルの欄のIDの欄に記憶されている構成要素と、内容および並び順が完全に一致している部分があることを指す。図3Aおよび図3Bに示す例では、ステンシルまたはラベルにより表示されるID305、312の構成要素の内容は、5、6、3、4、9、7、-、0、1であり、並び順は、左から、5、6、3、4、9、7、-、0、1の順である。従って、特定部1205は、5、6、3、4、9、7、-、0、1が左からこの順で並んでいる情報を、管理テーブル1300において管理されているIDの欄から特定する。ステップS1702で認識された情報において、これらの構成要素の一部が欠けている場合だけでなく、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素が並んでいる場合にも、当該ステップS1702で認識された情報は、現品表示の欄のステンシルの欄またはラベルの欄のIDの欄に記憶されている構成要素と、内容および並び順が完全に一致している情報ではないものとする。 Here, matching means that the information recognized in step S1702 completely matches the content and arrangement order of the components stored in the stencil column of the actual item display column or the ID column of the label column. It means that there is a part that is In the example shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the contents of the components of IDs 305 and 312 displayed by the stencil or label are 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, 1, and the arrangement order is , from left to right: 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, 1. Therefore, the identifying unit 1205 identifies information in which 5, 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, -, 0, and 1 are arranged in this order from the left from the ID column managed in the management table 1300. . In the information recognized in step S1702, not only when some of these constituent elements are missing, but also when constituent elements other than these constituent elements are lined up, the information recognized in step S1702 is It is assumed that the information does not completely match the content and arrangement order of the components stored in the stencil column of the actual item display column or the ID column of the label column.
 次に、ステップS1706において、位置導出部1206は、ステップS1701で取得された情報に基づいて、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置が既知であるか否かを判定する。本実施形態では、ガータ412および脚構造物413に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430a~430f、輸送車両700の待機位置に設置されている構造物に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430o~430p、工場内の置場に設置されている構造物に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430r~430w、および工場の生産ラインに設置されている構造物に取り付けられている第1の撮像装置430x~430yの三次元位置は既知であるものとする。これらの第1の撮像装置のそれぞれについて、第1の撮像装置のIDと、当該第1の撮像装置の位置情報(三次元座標(x-y-z座標))と、が相互に関連付けられて物品管理装置1200に予め登録されているものとする。位置導出部1206は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像装置のIDと同じIDと関連付けられている位置情報(三次元座標)が物品管理装置1200に予め登録されている場合、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置が既知であると判定し、そうでない場合、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置が既知でないと判定する。 Next, in step S1706, the position deriving unit 1206 determines whether the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image obtained in step S1701 is known, based on the information obtained in step S1701. Determine whether In this embodiment, the first imaging devices 430a to 430f are attached to the gutter 412 and the leg structure 413, and the first imaging device 430o is attached to the structure installed at the standby position of the transport vehicle 700. -430p, first imaging devices 430r to 430w attached to structures installed in a storage area in the factory, and first imaging devices attached to structures installed on the production line of the factory It is assumed that the three-dimensional positions 430x to 430y are known. For each of these first imaging devices, the ID of the first imaging device and the position information (three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates)) of the first imaging device are correlated with each other. It is assumed that it has been registered in the article management device 1200 in advance. If the position information (three-dimensional coordinates) associated with the same ID as the ID of the first imaging device acquired in step S1701 is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance, the position derivation unit 1206 determines the position information in step S1701. It is determined that the position of the first imaging device that captured the acquired first captured image is known, and if not, the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 is determined to be known. Determine that it is not known.
 ステップS1706の判定の結果、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置が既知でない場合、ステップS1707の処理が実行される。ステップS1707において、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置情報をステップS1701で取得したか否かを判定する。この判定の結果、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置情報をステップS1701で取得していない場合、処理は、後述するステップS1712に進む。 As a result of the determination in step S1706, if the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 is not known, the process in step S1707 is executed. In step S1707, the position derivation unit 1206 determines whether the position information of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image has been acquired in step S1701. As a result of this determination, if the position information of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image has not been acquired in step S1701, the process advances to step S1712, which will be described later.
 ステップS1706の判定の結果、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置が既知である場合と、ステップS1707の判定の結果、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置情報をステップS1701で取得した場合には、ステップS1708の処理が実行される。ステップS1708において、位置導出部1206は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができるか否かを判定する。尚、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができる場合の具体例については後述する。ステップS1708の判定の結果、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができない場合、処理は、後述するステップS1712に進む。 As a result of the determination in step S1706, the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 is known, and as a result of the determination in step S1707, the location of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image is known. If the position information of the first imaging device is acquired in step S1701, the process of step S1708 is executed. In step S1708, the position deriving unit 1206 determines whether the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified. Note that a specific example in which the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area using a stencil (label) can be specified will be described later. As a result of the determination in step S1708, if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) cannot be specified, the process proceeds to step S1712, which will be described later.
 一方、ステップS1708の判定の結果、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができた場合、ステップS1709の処理が実行される。ステップS1709において、位置導出部1206は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元座標(x-y-z座標)を、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の三次元位置として導出する。 On the other hand, as a result of the determination in step S1708, if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified, the process in step S1709 is executed. In step S1709, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified in step S1705.
 次に、ステップS1710において、記憶部1207は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板に対する情報として管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄の物品位置の欄に記憶されている情報を、ステップS1709で導出された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報に更新する。このように本実施形態では、管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄の物品位置の欄に記憶される情報が、情報表示位置である場合を例示する。また、本実施形態では、ステップS1709で導出された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報が、位置導出手段により新たに導出された情報表示位置の一例である。また、ステップS1710の処理が行われる前に管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄の物品位置の欄に記憶されている情報が、記憶媒体に既に記憶されている情報表示位置の一例である。管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄の物品位置の欄に記憶される情報は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域のx-y-z座標である。従って、情報表示位置は、三次元位置である。前述したように、同一の厚板の情報表示位置は、当該厚板の位置の移動に伴い、x座標およびy座標だけでなくz座標(高さ方向の位置)も変化する。本実施形態では、ステップS1710の処理により、存在する位置が変わる厚板の位置を追跡することが可能になる。 Next, in step S1710, the storage unit 1207 converts the information stored in the item position column of the non-in-stock item display column of the management table 1300 as information for the thick plate identified in step S1705 into the information derived in step S1709. The information is updated to indicate the three-dimensional position of the plank. As described above, this embodiment exemplifies a case where the information stored in the article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table 1300 is the information display position. Further, in this embodiment, the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate derived in step S1709 is an example of the information display position newly derived by the position deriving means. Furthermore, the information stored in the article position column of the non-in-stock item display column of the management table 1300 before the process of step S1710 is performed is an example of the information display position already stored in the storage medium. The information stored in the item position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table 1300 is the xyz coordinates of the display area by the stencil (label). Therefore, the information display position is a three-dimensional position. As described above, the information display position of the same thick plate changes not only the x-coordinate and y-coordinate but also the z-coordinate (position in the height direction) as the position of the thick plate changes. In this embodiment, the process of step S1710 makes it possible to track the position of the plank whose existing position changes.
 次に、ステップS1711において、出力部1208は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を出力する。例えば、出力部1208は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を、コンピュータディスプレイに表示させる。そして、図17のフローチャートによる処理が終了する。 Next, in step S1711, the output unit 1208 outputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate identified in step S1705. For example, the output unit 1208 causes the computer display to display information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank identified in step S1705. Then, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 17 ends.
 ここで、ステップS1709においてステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置を導出する方法の一例を、図2に示したステンシルによる表示領域201を例に挙げて説明する。図2に示す例では、ステンシルによる表示領域201は、厚板の板面の領域のうち、厚板の幅方向(y軸方向)の中央付近の領域であって、厚板の長さ方向の一端側(x軸の負の方向側)の領域にある。本実施形態では、ステンシルによる表示領域201の三次元位置が、情報表示位置の一例である。
 図18は、ステンシルによる表示領域201の三次元位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する図である。
Here, an example of a method for deriving the three-dimensional position of the stencil (label) display area in step S1709 will be described using the stencil display area 201 shown in FIG. 2 as an example. In the example shown in FIG. 2, the stencil display area 201 is a region of the plate surface of the plate near the center in the width direction (y-axis direction) of the plate and in the longitudinal direction of the plate. It is located in a region on one end side (negative direction side of the x-axis). In this embodiment, the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 by the stencil is an example of the information display position.
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 using a stencil.
 図18において、点Pは、第1の撮像装置の三次元位置を示す(点Pのx-y-z座標は(x,y,z)である)。第1の撮像装置の三次元位置は、例えば、第1の撮像装置の主点である。図18に示す例では、z軸は、厚板の表面(ステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面)に垂直な方向であるものとする。また、y軸は、ステンシルによる表示領域201において同一の表示項目の構成要素が並ぶ方向に平行な方向であるものとする。また、x軸は、ステンシルによる表示領域201において異なる表示項目が並ぶ方向に平行な方向であるものとする。また、x軸、y軸、z軸は相互に垂直であるものとする。また、ここでは、説明を簡単にするために、厚板の幅方向はy軸に平行であり、厚板の長さ方向はx軸に平行であるものとする。 In FIG. 18, point P indicates the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device (the xyz coordinates of point P are (x p , y p , z p )). The three-dimensional position of the first imaging device is, for example, the principal point of the first imaging device. In the example shown in FIG. 18, it is assumed that the z-axis is perpendicular to the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 formed by the stencil is formed). Further, it is assumed that the y-axis is parallel to the direction in which constituent elements of the same display item are lined up in the stencil display area 201. Further, it is assumed that the x-axis is parallel to the direction in which different display items are lined up in the display area 201 using the stencil. Further, it is assumed that the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are perpendicular to each other. Furthermore, here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the width direction of the thick plate is parallel to the y-axis, and the length direction of the thick plate is parallel to the x-axis.
 点Sは、ステンシルによる表示領域201の4つの頂点のうち、x軸の負の方向側に位置し、且つ、y軸の正の方向側に位置する頂点の位置を示す(点Sのx-y-z座標は(x,y,z)である)。点Oは、(x-y平面に対する)点Pの垂線の足(点Pの垂線とx-y平面との交点)である。図18に示す例では、点Oが原点であるものとする。点Qは、点Oを通り且つx軸に平行な直線と、点Sを通り且つy軸に平行な直線との交点である。 Point S indicates the position of the vertex that is located on the negative side of the x-axis and on the positive side of the y-axis among the four vertices of the display area 201 formed by the stencil (the x- The yz coordinates are (x s , y s , z s )). Point O is the foot of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) (the intersection of the perpendicular to point P and the xy plane). In the example shown in FIG. 18, point O is assumed to be the origin. Point Q is the intersection of a straight line passing through point O and parallel to the x-axis and a straight line passing through point S and parallel to the y-axis.
 ∠OPQをβ(rad)とし、線分OPの長さ(点Oから点Pまでの距離)をHとすると、線分OQの長さ(点Oから点Qまでの距離)Lは、以下の(1)式で表される。
 L=Htanβ ・・・(1)
If ∠OPQ is β (rad) and the length of line segment OP (distance from point O to point P) is H, then the length of line segment OQ (distance from point O to point Q) L is as follows. It is expressed by equation (1).
L=Htanβ...(1)
 また、∠OPSをα(rad)とすると、線分OSの長さ(点Oから点Sまでの長さ)lは、以下の(2)式で表される。そして、線分SQの長さ(点Sから点Qまでの距離)wは、以下の(3)式で表される。
 l=Htanα ・・・(2)
 w=(l-L0.5 ・・・(3)
Further, if ∠OPS is α (rad), the length of the line segment OS (the length from point O to point S) l is expressed by the following equation (2). The length of the line segment SQ (distance from point S to point Q) w y is expressed by the following equation (3).
l=Htanα...(2)
w y = (l 2 - L 2 ) 0.5 ...(3)
 従って、点Sのx-y-z座標S(x,y,z)は、以下の(4)式で表される。
 S(x,y,z)=(L,w,0) ・・・(4)
Therefore, the xyz coordinate S (x s , y s , z s ) of the point S is expressed by the following equation (4).
S(x s , y s , z s )=(L, w y , 0) (4)
 本実施形態では、線分OPの長さH、∠OPQ(=β)、∠OPS(=α)が定まった時に、位置導出部1206が、点Sのx-y-z座標(x,y,z)を、ステンシルによる表示領域201の位置として導出する場合を例示する。 In this embodiment, when the length H of the line segment OP, ∠OPQ (=β), and ∠OPS (=α) are determined, the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the xyz coordinates (x s , y s , z s ) are derived as the position of the display area 201 using a stencil.
 線分OPの長さHは、点Pのz座標zから、ステンシルによる表示領域201のz座標zを減算した値である。従って、ステンシルによる表示領域201のz座標(ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置)が特定されていれば、線分OPの長さHを導出することができる。尚、図18では、ステンシルによる表示領域201のz座標zが0(ゼロ)である場合を例示するので、線分OPの長さHは、点Pのz座標zに等しい。 The length H of the line segment OP is the value obtained by subtracting the z-coordinate zs of the display area 201 by the stencil from the z-coordinate zp of the point P. Therefore, if the z-coordinate of the stencil display area 201 (the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the stencil display area 201) is specified, the length H of the line segment OP can be derived. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a case where the z-coordinate zs of the stencil display area 201 is 0 (zero), so the length H of the line segment OP is equal to the z-coordinate zp of the point P.
 第1の撮像画像における点Sの位置は、例えば、以下のようにして導出される。位置導出部1206は、ステップS1702で認識されたステンシルによる表示項目の構成要素のうち、x軸の最大値、x軸の最小値、y軸の最大値、およびy軸の最小値となる位置により定まる外接矩形を導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、導出した外接矩形の頂点のうち、ステンシルによる表示項目の構成要素の頂部が上側に位置するように見た場合に、例えば左下側(x軸の負の方向側およびy軸の正の方向側)に位置する頂点の位置を、第1の撮像画像における点Sの位置として導出する。尚、第1の撮像画像においてラベルによる表示がなされている場合、位置導出部1206は、矩形状のラベルの頂点のうち、ステンシルによる表示項目の構成要素の頂部が上側に位置するように見た場合に、例えば左下側に位置する頂点を、第1の撮像画像における点Sの位置として導出する。 The position of point S in the first captured image is derived, for example, as follows. The position deriving unit 1206 determines the position of the maximum value of the x-axis, the minimum value of the x-axis, the maximum value of the y-axis, and the minimum value of the y-axis among the components of the display item by the stencil recognized in step S1702. Derive the fixed circumscribed rectangle. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 determines, among the vertices of the derived circumscribed rectangle, the lower left side (the negative side of the x-axis and the The position of the vertex located in the positive direction of the y-axis is derived as the position of the point S in the first captured image. Note that when a label is displayed in the first captured image, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position deriving unit 1206 so that, among the vertices of the rectangular label, the top of the constituent element of the stencil display item is located on the upper side. In this case, for example, the vertex located on the lower left side is derived as the position of point S in the first captured image.
 第1の撮像画像における点Qの位置は、第1の撮像画像における点Sの位置を通り且つy軸に平行な直線上の位置であって、撮像時の水平画角(y軸方向の画角)の中心に対応する位置となる。尚、点Qの特定は、例えば、以下のようにして行ってもよい。即ち、レーザポインタ等で点Pからレーザ光を照射して、点Sの位置を通り、且つ、y軸に平行な直線を、厚板の板面のうちステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面に表示する。また、レーザポインタ等で点Pからレーザ光を照射して、点Oを通り、且つ、x軸に平行な直線を、厚板の板面のうちステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面に表示する。このようにする場合、レーザ光により表示される2つの直線の交点が点Qとなる。従って、位置導出部1206は、レーザ光により表示される2つの直線の交点が表示されている状態で撮像された第1の撮像画像から点Qを特定してもよい。このようにすれば、点P、点O、および点Qがx-z平面上(y=0の平面上)にある場合、厚板の板面のうちステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面がx-y平面に対して傾いていても、点Qの位置を特定することができる。 The position of point Q in the first captured image is a position on a straight line that passes through the position of point S in the first captured image and is parallel to the y-axis, and The position corresponds to the center of the corner). Note that the point Q may be specified, for example, as follows. That is, a display area 201 is formed by stenciling a straight line passing through the position of point S and parallel to the y-axis by irradiating a laser beam from point P with a laser pointer or the like on the plate surface of the thick plate. display on the screen. In addition, a laser beam is irradiated from point P using a laser pointer or the like, and a straight line passing through point O and parallel to the x-axis is drawn on the surface of the thick plate where the display area 201 by the stencil is formed. indicate. In this case, the point Q is the intersection of the two straight lines displayed by the laser beam. Therefore, the position derivation unit 1206 may identify the point Q from the first captured image captured while the intersection of two straight lines displayed by the laser beam is displayed. In this way, when point P, point O, and point Q are on the xz plane (on the plane where y=0), the display area 201 by the stencil is formed on the plate surface of the thick plate. Even if the plane is tilted with respect to the xy plane, the position of point Q can be specified.
 ∠OPS(=α)、∠OPQ(=β)、および∠SPQ(=δ)は、例えば、位置導出部1206は、以下のようにして導出してもよい。まず、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像装置が備える測距センサ(例えばTOF(Time-of-Flight)方式の測距センサ)の測定値に基づいて、線分PSおよび点PQの長さを導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、ステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面がx-y平面であり、線分QSがy軸方向に延びる直線であるものとして、点Sおよび点Qの位置を特定する。そして、位置導出部1206は、点P、点S、点Qの位置に基づいて、∠OPS(=α)、∠OPQ(=β)、および∠SPQ(=δ)を導出する。 For example, the position derivation unit 1206 may derive ∠OPS (=α), ∠OPQ (=β), and ∠SPQ (=δ) as follows. First, the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the lengths of the line segment PS and the point PQ based on the measurement value of a distance measurement sensor (for example, a TOF (Time-of-Flight) distance measurement sensor) included in the first imaging device. Derive. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the positions of the points S and Q assuming that the plane on which the stencil display area 201 is formed is the xy plane and the line segment QS is a straight line extending in the y-axis direction. Identify. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 derives ∠OPS (=α), ∠OPQ (=β), and ∠SPQ (=δ) based on the positions of point P, point S, and point Q.
 また、例えば、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像装置から点Sに向けて照射されたレーザ光の角度と、第1の撮像装置から点Qに向けて照射されたレーザ光の角度と、第1の撮像装置から点Sから点Qまでレーザ光が走査されたときの走査角度とに基づいて、∠OPS(=α)、∠OPQ(=β)、および∠SPQ=(=δ)を導出してもよい。 Further, for example, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the angle of the laser beam irradiated toward the point S from the first imaging device, the angle of the laser beam irradiated toward the point Q from the first imaging device, Based on the scanning angle when the laser beam is scanned from the first imaging device from point S to point Q, ∠OPS (=α), ∠OPQ (=β), and ∠SPQ=(=δ) are calculated. May be derived.
 また、位置導出部1206は、厚板の板面のうちステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面と点Oとを含む領域に格子状のレーザ光を照射した状態で撮像された第1の撮像画像において格子状に並んでいる矩形の数を計数することにより、∠OPS(=α)、∠OPQ(=β)、および∠SPQ(=δ)を導出してもよい。このようにする場合、1つの矩形のx軸方向の長さは、例えば、∠OPS(=α)および∠OPQ(=β)が1rad変化すると変化するx軸方向の長さであり、y軸方向の長さは、例えば、∠SPQ(=δ)が1rad変化すると変化するy軸方向の長さである。点Oに対応する位置にある矩形から、点S、Qに対応する矩形までの矩形の数の計数の結果に基づいて、∠OPS(=α)、∠OPQ(=β)が導出される。また、点Sに対応する位置にある矩形から点Qに対応する位置にある矩形までの矩形の数の計数の結果に基づいて、∠SPQ(=δ)が導出される。矩形の数の計数は、第1の撮像画像に対する画像処理の結果に基づいて行われる。 The position derivation unit 1206 also generates a first image that is imaged while irradiating a grid-shaped laser beam onto a region of the plate surface of the thick plate that includes the surface where the stencil display area 201 is formed and the point O. By counting the number of rectangles arranged in a grid in the captured image, ∠OPS (=α), ∠OPQ (=β), and ∠SPQ (=δ) may be derived. In this case, the length of one rectangle in the x-axis direction is, for example, the length in the x-axis direction that changes when ∠OPS (=α) and ∠OPQ (=β) change by 1 rad, and the length in the y-axis direction The length in the direction is, for example, the length in the y-axis direction that changes when ∠SPQ (=δ) changes by 1 rad. Based on the result of counting the number of rectangles from the rectangle located at the position corresponding to point O to the rectangle corresponding to points S and Q, ∠OPS (=α) and ∠OPQ (=β) are derived. Furthermore, ∠SPQ (=δ) is derived based on the result of counting the number of rectangles from the rectangle located at the position corresponding to point S to the rectangle located at the position corresponding to point Q. The number of rectangles is counted based on the result of image processing on the first captured image.
 尚、表示領域1111、1121、1131、1141の位置についても、図18を参照しながら説明した手法と同様に導出される。また、ステンシルによる表示領域201と、ラベル202による表示領域とは、厚板において配置される面が異なるだけであるので、ラベル202による表示領域の位置についても、図18を参照しながら説明した手法に倣って導出することができる。従って、ここでは、その詳細な説明を省略する。 Note that the positions of the display areas 1111, 1121, 1131, and 1141 are also derived in the same manner as the method described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, since the display area 201 using the stencil and the display area using the label 202 differ only in the surface on which they are arranged on the thick plate, the position of the display area using the label 202 is also determined by the method described with reference to FIG. It can be derived according to the following. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.
 次に、ステップS1708において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができると判定される場合の一例を説明する。
 第1の例として、まず、位置導出部1206は、レーザ距離計を用いて第1の撮像装置からステンシルによる表示領域までの高さ方向(z軸方向)の距離を導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置から、当該距離を減算した位置を、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置として導出する。
Next, an example will be described in which it is determined in step S1708 that the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified.
As a first example, the position deriving unit 1206 first derives the distance in the height direction (z-axis direction) from the first imaging device to the stencil display area using a laser range finder. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position obtained by subtracting the distance from the position of the first imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction) as the position of the display area 201 by the stencil in the height direction (z-axis direction). Derive it as
 第2の例として、位置導出部1206は、管理テーブル1300の物品位置の欄に記憶されている、厚板の位置を示す情報と、管理テーブル1300の登録時刻の欄に記憶されている、厚板が現在の位置に置かれた日時を示す情報と、を用いて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する。このようにしてステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する。尚、ここでは、管理テーブル1300の物品位置の欄に記憶されている、厚板の三次元位置を、必要に応じて、物品位置と称する。また、ここでは、説明を簡単にするため、積み重ねられている複数の厚板のうち最下段にある厚板が地面に置かれているものとする。 As a second example, the position deriving unit 1206 extracts the information indicating the position of the thick plate stored in the article position column of the management table 1300 and the thickness information stored in the registration time column of the management table 1300. Using information indicating the date and time when the board was placed at the current position, the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) is derived. An example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by a stencil (label) in this manner will be described. Note that here, the three-dimensional position of the thick plate stored in the article position column of the management table 1300 is referred to as an article position, as necessary. In addition, here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the lowest plank among a plurality of stacked planks is placed on the ground.
 まず、位置導出部1206は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板以外の厚板から、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の撮像範囲(x-y座標)に少なくとも一部が含まれる厚板を、管理テーブル1300に記憶されている物品位置に基づいて特定する。 First, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the imaging range (xy coordinates) of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 from a plank other than the plank identified in step S1705. A plank plate that includes at least a portion of the board is identified based on the article position stored in the management table 1300.
 ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する場合には、ステップS1705で特定された厚板は最上段にある。従って、位置導出部1206は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の撮像範囲(x-y座標)に少なくとも一部が含まれる厚板は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の下にあると判断する。この場合、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の下にある厚板の情報として管理テーブル1300に記憶されているサイズ(厚み)の全てと、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の厚みとを加算した値が、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置となる。 When deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 using the stencil, the thick plate specified in step S1705 is at the top. Therefore, in step S1705, the position deriving unit 1206 determines that the thick plate, at least a part of which is included in the imaging range (xy coordinates) of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701, is Determine that it is under the identified plank. In this case, all the sizes (thicknesses) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the planks below the plank identified in step S1705 are added to the thickness of the plank specified in step S1705. The value is the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 by the stencil.
 一方、ラベルによる表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する場合には、位置導出部1206は、前述したようにして特定された厚板のうち、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の情報として管理テーブル1300の登録時刻の欄に記憶されている日時よりも遅い日時が登録時刻の欄に記憶されている厚板が、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の下にある厚板であると判断する。この場合、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の下にある厚板の情報として管理テーブル1300に記憶されているサイズ(厚み)の全ての加算値と、ステップS1705で特定された厚板の情報として管理テーブル1300に記憶されている物品内位置のz座標の値とを加算した値が、ラベル202による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置となる。 On the other hand, when deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the label, the position derivation unit 1206 uses the thickness specified in step S1705 among the thick plates specified as described above. A plank whose date and time is later than the date and time stored in the registration time column of the management table 1300 as plank information is a plank below the plank identified in step S1705. It is determined that In this case, all the added values of the size (thickness) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the plank below the plank specified in step S1705, and the information on the plank specified in step S1705. The value obtained by adding the value of the z-coordinate of the position within the article stored in the management table 1300 becomes the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area of the label 202.
 第3の例として、第1の撮像画像に高さ方向(z軸方向)を特定することが可能な情報が表示されている場合、位置導出部1206は、当該情報に基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出することができる。このようにしてステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する。例えば、位置導出部1206は、高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を示す目盛りが表示された構造物が第1の撮像画像に含まれる場合、第1の撮像画像から当該構造物の当該目盛りを認識する。例えば、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像画像に対してエッジ検出処理を実行してオブジェクトのエッジを抽出し、抽出したオブジェクトから、当該構造物を抽出する。例えば、オブジェクトの輪郭を示す情報と、当該オブジェクトの名称とが相互に関連付けられた情報を物品管理装置1200に予め登録しておく。このようにする場合、位置導出部1206は、前述したようにして抽出されたオブジェクトのエッジと、当該情報とを比較することにより、当該構造物に対応するオブジェクトを抽出してもよい。また、位置導出部1206は、NN(Neural Network)等のAI(Artificial Intelligence)を用いて、前述したようにして抽出されたオブジェクトから、当該構造物を抽出してもよい。 As a third example, when information that allows the height direction (z-axis direction) to be specified is displayed in the first captured image, the position derivation unit 1206 generates a stencil (label) based on the information. ) can derive the position of the display area in the height direction (z-axis direction). An example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by a stencil (label) in this manner will be described. For example, if the first captured image includes a structure on which a scale indicating the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) is displayed, the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the scale of the structure from the first captured image. Recognize. For example, the position derivation unit 1206 performs edge detection processing on the first captured image to extract edges of the object, and extracts the structure from the extracted object. For example, information in which information indicating the outline of an object and the name of the object are mutually associated is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance. In this case, the position deriving unit 1206 may extract the object corresponding to the structure by comparing the edge of the object extracted as described above with the information. Further, the position derivation unit 1206 may extract the structure from the objects extracted as described above using AI (Artificial Intelligence) such as NN (Neural Network).
 そして、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像画像におけるステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置と、第1の撮像画像における当該構造物に表示されている目盛りの位置とに基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する。尚、第1の撮像画像において目盛りに付されている数字は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示項目の構成要素を認識する手法と同様の手法で認識される。 Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the stencil (label) based on the position of the display area of the stencil (label) in the first captured image and the position of the scale displayed on the structure in the first captured image. ) is derived from the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area. Note that the numbers attached to the scale in the first captured image are recognized using a method similar to the method for recognizing the constituent elements of display items using stencils (labels).
 第4の例として、位置導出部1206は、第2の画像取得部1209で取得される第2の撮像画像を用いて、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出してもよい。この場合、図17のフローチャートにおいて、ステップS1708の処理が開始されるタイミングよりも前に、第2の画像取得部1209により第2の撮像画像を取得するステップが追加される。第2の撮像画像は、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置(ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域を含む領域を撮像する撮像装置)とは別の第2の撮像装置で撮像された撮像画像である。第2の撮像画像は、ステップS1701で取得された第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置と、ステップS1705で特定される厚板との双方を含む。このようにしてステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する。 As a fourth example, the position derivation unit 1206 uses the second captured image acquired by the second image acquisition unit 1209 to derive the position of the display area 201 by the stencil in the height direction (z-axis direction). You may. In this case, in the flowchart of FIG. 17, a step is added in which the second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires the second captured image before the processing in step S1708 is started. The second captured image was captured by a second imaging device that is different from the first imaging device that captured the first captured image (an imaging device that captures an area including a stencil (label) display area). This is a captured image. The second captured image includes both the first imaging device that captured the first captured image acquired in step S1701 and the thick plate identified in step S1705. An example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 using a stencil in this manner will be described.
 図19は、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する図である。
 図19に示す例においても、図18と同様に、点Pは、第1の撮像装置の位置を示す(点Pのx-y-z座標は(x,y,z)である)。また、z軸は、厚板の表面(ステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面)に垂直な方向である。また、y軸は、ステンシルによる表示領域201において同一の表示項目の構成要素が並ぶ方向に平行な方向である。また、x軸は、ステンシルによる表示領域201において異なる表示項目が並ぶ方向に平行な方向である。また、x軸、y軸、z軸は相互に垂直であるものとする。ここでも、説明を簡単にするために、厚板の幅方向はy軸に平行であり、厚板の長さ方向はx軸に平行であるものとする。
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 using a stencil.
In the example shown in FIG. 19, similarly to FIG. 18, point P indicates the position of the first imaging device (xyz coordinates of point P are (x p , y p , z p ) ). Further, the z-axis is a direction perpendicular to the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 by the stencil is formed). Further, the y-axis is a direction parallel to the direction in which constituent elements of the same display item are lined up in the stencil display area 201. Further, the x-axis is a direction parallel to the direction in which different display items are lined up in the stencil display area 201. Further, it is assumed that the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are perpendicular to each other. Again, to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the width direction of the plank is parallel to the y-axis, and the length direction of the plank is parallel to the x-axis.
 また、点O’は、(x-y平面に対する)点Pの垂線と、厚板の表面(ステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面)を含む平面と、の交点である(点O’は図18の点Oに対応する)。点Oは、(x-y平面に対する)点Pの垂線の足(点Pの垂線とx-y平面との交点)である。図19に示す例では、点Oが原点であるものとする。点Rは、第2の撮像装置の三次元位置を示す(点Rのx-y-z座標は(x,y,z)である)。第2の撮像装置の三次元位置は、例えば、第2の撮像装置の主点の位置である。 Further, point O' is the intersection of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) and the plane that includes the surface of the thick plate (the surface on which the display area 201 by the stencil is formed) (point O' corresponds to point O in FIG. 18). Point O is the foot of the perpendicular to point P (with respect to the xy plane) (the intersection of the perpendicular to point P and the xy plane). In the example shown in FIG. 19, point O is assumed to be the origin. Point R indicates the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device (the xyz coordinates of point R are (x r , y r , z r )). The three-dimensional position of the second imaging device is, for example, the position of the principal point of the second imaging device.
 第2の撮像装置の三次元位置は、物品管理装置1200で特定することが可能であるものとする。例えば、第2の撮像装置の三次元位置が固定である場合、第2の撮像装置のIDと、当該第2の撮像装置の三次元座標(x-y-z座標)と、が相互に関連付けられて物品管理装置1200に予め登録される。また、第2の撮像装置の三次元位置が固定でない場合、例えば、第2の撮像装置は、GPSを用いて測位された当該第2の撮像装置の三次元座標(x-y-z座標)と当該第2の撮像装置のIDとを送信する。この場合、第2の画像取得部1209は、第2の撮像装置から送信されたこれらの情報を取得する。 It is assumed that the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device can be specified by the article management device 1200. For example, if the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device is fixed, the ID of the second imaging device and the three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) of the second imaging device are associated with each other. and registered in the article management device 1200 in advance. In addition, if the three-dimensional position of the second imaging device is not fixed, for example, the second imaging device can use the three-dimensional coordinates (x-y-z coordinates) of the second imaging device that are positioned using GPS. and the ID of the second imaging device. In this case, the second image acquisition unit 1209 acquires this information transmitted from the second imaging device.
 図19に示す例では、説明を簡単にするため、積み重ねられている複数の厚板のうち最下段にある厚板が地面に置かれているものとする。点Dは、ステンシルによる表示領域201が形成されている面の頂点のうち、点Rに最も近い位置にある頂点である。点Bは、積み重ねられている複数の厚板のうち最下段にある厚板の底面の頂点のうち、点Rに最も近い位置にある頂点である。 In the example shown in FIG. 19, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the lowest plank among a plurality of stacked planks is placed on the ground. Point D is the vertex closest to point R among the vertices of the surface on which the stencil display area 201 is formed. Point B is the vertex closest to point R among the vertices of the bottom surface of the lowest plank among the plurality of stacked planks.
 図19において、∠BRD(=φ)および∠PRO(=φ)は、例えば、第2の撮像画像における点P、点B、および点Dの位置と、当該第2の撮像画像の主点と、に基づいて定められる。第2の撮像画像における点Pと、第2の撮像画像の主点とを結ぶ直線により、線分RPが延びる方向が特定される。第2の撮像画像における点Bと、第2の撮像画像の主点とを結ぶ直線により、線分RBが延びる方向が特定される。第2の撮像画像における点Dと、第2の撮像画像の主点とを結ぶ直線により、線分RTが延びる方向が特定される。∠BRD(=φ)は、線分RBが延びる方向と、線分RDが延びる方向と、に基づいて定められる。∠PRO(=φ)は、線分RPが延びる方向と、y軸方向と、に基づいて定められる。 In FIG. 19, ∠BRD (=φ B ) and ∠PRO (=φ P ) are, for example, the positions of point P, point B, and point D in the second captured image, and the main character of the second captured image. It is determined based on the points and. The direction in which the line segment RP extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point P in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image. The direction in which the line segment RB extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point B in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image. The direction in which the line segment RT extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point D in the second captured image and the principal point of the second captured image. ∠BRD (=φ B ) is determined based on the direction in which line segment RB extends and the direction in which line segment RD extends. ∠PRO (=φ P ) is determined based on the direction in which the line segment RP extends and the y-axis direction.
 また、例えば、位置導出部1206は、第2の撮像装置が備える測距センサ(例えばTOF(Time-of-Flight)方式の測距センサ)の測定値に基づいて、線分RPの長さ(点Rから点Pまでの距離)および線分RD(点Rから点Dまでの距離)の長さを導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、第2の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置(z)と、線分RPの長さと、∠PRO(=φ)とに基づいて、第1の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置(z)を導出する(z=z+線分RPの長さ×sinφ)。同様に、位置導出部1206は、第2の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置(z)と、線分RDの長さと、∠BRD(=φ)に基づいて、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する。 Further, for example, the position derivation unit 1206 calculates the length of the line segment RP ( The lengths of the line segment RD (distance from point R to point D) and line segment RD (distance from point R to point D) are derived. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position (z r ) of the second imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction), the length of the line segment RP, and ∠PRO (=φ P ). The position (z p ) of the No. 1 imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction) is derived (z p =z r +length of line segment RP×sinφ P ). Similarly, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the stencil based on the position (z r ) of the second imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction), the length of the line segment RD, and ∠BRD (=φ B ). The position of the display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction) is derived.
 尚、図19では、第2の撮像装置(点R)の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置が0(ゼロ)である場合を例示する。また、以上のように第2の撮像画像を用いれば、位置導出部1206は、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置だけでなく、第1の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置(z)を導出することができる。また、位置導出部1206は、高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置だけでなく、第1の撮像装置のx軸方向の位置(x)およびy軸方向の位置(y)も導出することができる。例えば、x、yは、線分RPが延びる方向と、y+線分RPの長さ×cosφとに基づいて導出される。即ち、線分RPが延びる方向と、y+線分RPの長さ×cosφとに基づいて、点R、Pを結ぶベクトルが導出される。当該ベクトルのx軸成分の長さ、y軸成分の長さが、x、yとなる。 Note that FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the position of the second imaging device (point R) in the height direction (z-axis direction) is 0 (zero). Furthermore, if the second captured image is used as described above, the position deriving unit 1206 can calculate not only the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area 201 by the stencil, but also the position in the height direction of the first imaging device. The position (z p ) (in the z-axis direction) can be derived. Further, the position deriving unit 1206 derives not only the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) but also the position in the x-axis direction (x p ) and the position in the y-axis direction (y p ) of the first imaging device. be able to. For example, x p and y p are derived based on the direction in which the line segment RP extends and y r +length of the line segment RP×cosφ P. That is, a vector connecting points R and P is derived based on the direction in which line segment RP extends and y r +length of line segment RP x cosφ P. The length of the x-axis component and the length of the y-axis component of the vector are x p and y p .
 また、ここでは、第2の撮像装置により撮像される第2の撮像画像に点P(第1の撮像装置)が含まれる場合を例に挙げて説明した。しかしながら、第1の撮像装置(点P)と第2の撮像装置(点R)との相対的な位置関係(∠PRO(=φ)等)を導出することができれば、必ずしもこのようにする必要はない。このようにする場合、例えば、第1の撮像装置および第2の撮像装置と異なる少なくとも1つの撮像装置で撮像された撮像画像を用いる。このようにする場合の具体例を説明する。まず、第1の撮像装置および第2の撮像装置に加えて第3の撮像装置を配置する。第3の撮像装置は、点P(第1の撮像装置)および点R(第2の撮像装置)を撮像範囲に含み、点Dを撮像範囲に含まないものとする。また、第3の撮像装置の位置を示す点を不図示のR’とする。また、第2の撮像装置の位置を示す点Rの位置と第3の撮像装置の位置を示す点R’の位置との一方または両方が予め定められているものとする。この場合、位置導出部1206は、第3の撮像装置により撮像される第3の撮像画像に基づいて、点R’から点R、点Pを見たときの仰角または俯角を導出する、そして、位置導出部1206は、導出した仰角または俯角に基づいて、∠PRO(=φ)を導出する。角度、方向、および長さの導出は、図19を参照しながら説明した手法と同様の手法で実現される。また、第3の撮像装置の撮像範囲に点P(第1の撮像装置)が含まれ、点R(第2の撮像装置)が含まれていない場合には、例えば、点R’(第3の撮像装置)および点R(第2の撮像装置)を撮像範囲に含む第4の撮像装置により撮像された第4の撮像画像を更に用いればよい。一方、例えば、第3の撮像装置の撮像範囲に点R(第2の撮像装置)が含まれ、点P(第1の撮像装置)が含まれていない場合には、例えば、点R’(第3の撮像装置)および点P(第1の撮像装置)を撮像範囲に含む第5の撮像装置により撮像された第5の撮像画像を更に用いればよい。 Further, here, a case has been described as an example in which the point P (first imaging device) is included in the second captured image captured by the second imaging device. However, if it is possible to derive the relative positional relationship (∠PRO (=φ P ), etc.) between the first imaging device (point P) and the second imaging device (point R), it is not necessary to do it this way. There's no need. In this case, for example, a captured image captured by at least one imaging device different from the first imaging device and the second imaging device is used. A specific example of such a case will be explained. First, a third imaging device is arranged in addition to the first imaging device and the second imaging device. It is assumed that the third imaging device includes point P (first imaging device) and point R (second imaging device) in its imaging range, but does not include point D in its imaging range. Further, a point indicating the position of the third imaging device is designated as R' (not shown). Further, it is assumed that one or both of the position of point R indicating the position of the second imaging device and the position of point R' indicating the position of the third imaging device are determined in advance. In this case, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the elevation angle or depression angle when looking at point R and point P from point R′ based on the third captured image captured by the third imaging device, and The position derivation unit 1206 derives ∠PRO (=φ P ) based on the derived elevation angle or depression angle. Derivation of angle, direction, and length is achieved using a method similar to that described with reference to FIG. 19. Furthermore, if the imaging range of the third imaging device includes point P (first imaging device) and does not include point R (second imaging device), for example, point R' (third imaging device) is included in the imaging range of the third imaging device. What is necessary is to further use a fourth captured image captured by a fourth imaging device whose imaging range includes the point R (the second imaging device) and the point R (the second imaging device). On the other hand, if the imaging range of the third imaging device includes point R (second imaging device) and does not include point P (first imaging device), for example, point R'( It is sufficient to further use a fifth captured image captured by a fifth imaging device whose imaging range includes the point P (the third imaging device) and the point P (the first imaging device).
 また、位置導出部1206は、点P(第1の撮像装置)の位置を、第1の撮像装置を撮像範囲に含む第6の撮像装置により撮像される第6の撮像画像を用いて特定してもよい。この場合、第2の撮像装置、第3の撮像装置、および第4の撮像装置の少なくとも1つの撮像範囲に第6の撮像装置が含まれるものとする。また、第6の撮像装置の位置を示す点を不図示のP’とする。また、第1の撮像装置の位置を示す点Pの位置と第6の撮像装置の位置を示す点P’の位置との一方または両方が予め定められているものとする。この場合、例えば、前述した説明において、第1の撮像装置および点Pに代えて第6の撮像装置および点P’を用いた計算が行われる。そして、例えば、この計算の結果と、第6の撮像画像と、点Pおよび点P’の一方または両方の位置と、に基づいて、第1の撮像装置(点P)と第2の撮像装置(点R)との相対的な位置関係(∠PRO(=φ)等)が導出される。 Further, the position deriving unit 1206 identifies the position of the point P (first imaging device) using a sixth captured image captured by a sixth imaging device whose imaging range includes the first imaging device. It's okay. In this case, it is assumed that the sixth imaging device is included in the imaging range of at least one of the second imaging device, the third imaging device, and the fourth imaging device. Further, a point indicating the position of the sixth imaging device is designated as P' (not shown). Further, it is assumed that one or both of the position of the point P indicating the position of the first imaging device and the position of the point P' indicating the position of the sixth imaging device are determined in advance. In this case, for example, in the above description, calculation is performed using the sixth imaging device and point P' instead of the first imaging device and point P. Then, for example, based on the result of this calculation, the sixth captured image, and the position of one or both of point P and point P', the first imaging device (point P) and the second imaging device A relative positional relationship (∠PRO (=φ P ), etc.) with (point R) is derived.
 以上のようにすれば、第2の撮像装置の撮像範囲に第1の撮像装置と厚板との双方を含めるように第2の撮像装置を配置することができない場合であっても、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出することができる。尚、第3~第6の撮像画像は、例えば、第2の画像取得部1209により取得される。ただし、第2の画像取得部1209とは別に、第3~第6の撮像画像を個別に取得する第3~第6の画像取得部を用いてもよい。このようにする場合、図17のフローチャートにおいて、ステップS1708の処理が開始されるタイミングよりも前のタイミングであって、第2の画像取得部1209により第2の撮像画像を取得するステップが実行されるタイミングとは別のタイミングに、第3~第6の撮像画像を個別に取得するステップが追加される。尚、第2の撮像画像等を取得しなくても、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができる場合には、第2の画像取得部1209は不要になる。 With the above method, even if the second imaging device cannot be arranged so that the imaging range of the second imaging device includes both the first imaging device and the thick plate, the stencil The position of the display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction) can be derived. Note that the third to sixth captured images are acquired by, for example, the second image acquisition unit 1209. However, in addition to the second image acquisition unit 1209, third to sixth image acquisition units that individually acquire the third to sixth captured images may be used. In this case, in the flowchart of FIG. 17, the step of acquiring the second captured image by the second image acquisition unit 1209 is executed at a timing before the timing at which the process of step S1708 is started. A step of individually acquiring the third to sixth captured images is added at a timing different from the timing at which the third to sixth captured images are acquired. Note that if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be specified without acquiring the second captured image, etc., the second image acquisition unit 1209 becomes unnecessary.
 第5の例として、位置導出部1206は、搬送テーブル1001に置かれている厚板1002a、1002bの、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を、搬送テーブル1001の位置と、厚板1000a、1002bの情報として管理テーブル1300に記憶されているサイズ(厚み)とに基づいて導出してもよい。このようにする場合、搬送テーブル1001の位置は、物品管理装置1200に予め登録される。 As a fifth example, the position deriving unit 1206 converts the height direction (z-axis direction) of the stencil display area 201 of the thick plates 1002a and 1002b placed on the transport table 1001 into the position of the transport table 1001. and the size (thickness) stored in the management table 1300 as information on the thick plates 1000a and 1002b. In this case, the position of the transport table 1001 is registered in the article management device 1200 in advance.
 例えば、以上の例の少なくとも1つの例において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出することができる場合、ステップS1708において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができると判定される。 For example, in at least one of the above examples, if the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) can be derived, in step S1708, the position of the display area by the stencil (label) is determined. It is determined that the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) can be specified.
 また、厚板が運搬具にある場合、ステップS1709において、位置導出部1206は、運搬具における厚板の三次元位置を取得する。本実施形態では、運搬具は、輸送船400および輸送車両700である。そこで、本実施形態では、運搬具が、輸送船400および輸送車両700である場合を例示する。
 例えば、厚板が輸送船400に荷積みされると、位置導出部1206は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送船400における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを取得する。そして、位置導出部1206は、管理テーブル1300のIDの欄から、取得した厚板のIDと同じIDを示す情報が記憶されている列を特定する。そして、位置導出部1206は、特定した列の物品位置の欄に、取得した輸送船400における厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を記憶する。例えば、輸送船400のオペレータ(作業員)が、手持ちの情報処理端末(タブレット端末等)に厚板のIDと輸送船400における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを入力してもよい。このようにする場合、当該情報処理端末から物品管理装置1200に、厚板のIDと輸送船400における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを送信することで、位置導出部1206は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送船400における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを取得してもよい。厚板の三次元位置を示す情報は、例えば、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域のx-y-z座標である。
Further, if the plank is on the carrier, in step S1709, the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the three-dimensional position of the plank on the carrier. In this embodiment, the carriers are a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700. Therefore, in this embodiment, a case where the transport equipment is a transport ship 400 and a transport vehicle 700 will be exemplified.
For example, when a plank is loaded onto the transport ship 400, the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank on the transport ship 400. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 identifies a column in which information indicating the same ID as the acquired thick plate ID is stored from the ID column of the management table 1300. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 stores information indicating the acquired three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 in the article position column of the specified column. For example, the operator (worker) of the transport ship 400 may input the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.). . In this case, by transmitting the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 from the information processing terminal to the article management device 1200, the position derivation unit 1206 The ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport ship 400 may be acquired. The information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is, for example, the xyz coordinates of the display area by a stencil (label).
 また、厚板が輸送車両700に荷積みされると、位置導出部1206は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送車両700における厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを取得する。そして、位置導出部1206は、は、管理テーブル1300のIDの欄から、取得した厚板のIDと同じIDを示す情報が記憶されている列を特定する。そして、位置導出部1206は、特定した列の物品位置の欄に、取得した輸送車両700における厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を記憶する。例えば、輸送車両700のオペレータ(作業員)が、手持ちの情報処理端末(タブレット端末等)に厚板のIDと輸送車両700における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを入力してもよい。このようにする場合、当該情報処理端末から物品管理装置1200に、厚板のIDと当該輸送車両700における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを送信することで、位置導出部1206は、当該厚板のIDと当該輸送車両700における当該厚板の三次元位置を示す情報とを取得してもよい。厚板の三次元位置を示す情報は、例えば、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域のx-y-z座標である。 Furthermore, when the plank is loaded onto the transport vehicle 700, the position derivation unit 1206 acquires the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport vehicle 700. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 specifies, from the ID column of the management table 1300, a column in which information indicating the same ID as the obtained ID of the thick plate is stored. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 stores information indicating the obtained three-dimensional position of the thick plate in the transportation vehicle 700 in the article position column of the specified column. For example, the operator (worker) of the transport vehicle 700 may input the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport vehicle 700 into a handheld information processing terminal (tablet terminal, etc.). . In this case, by transmitting the ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transport vehicle 700 from the information processing terminal to the article management device 1200, the position deriving unit 1206 can: The ID of the plank and information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank in the transportation vehicle 700 may be acquired. The information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank is, for example, the xyz coordinates of the display area by a stencil (label).
 以上のように運搬具における厚板の三次元位置を取得することにより、各厚板を搬送する運搬具を特定することができる。また、運搬具により厚板が搬送中であるときの厚板の三次元位置を正確に特定することができる。 By acquiring the three-dimensional positions of the planks on the carrier as described above, it is possible to specify the carrier that transports each plank. Further, it is possible to accurately specify the three-dimensional position of the plank while the plank is being transported by the carrier.
 第6の例として、撮像素子の画素数およびサイズ(各画素の長さ[m/画素])と、撮像素子から主点までの距離である焦点距離と、がわかっている撮像装置を用いて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の実空間における位置を取得することで、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出してもよい。 As a sixth example, use an imaging device in which the number of pixels and size of the image sensor (length of each pixel [m/pixel]) and the focal length, which is the distance from the image sensor to the principal point, are known. By acquiring the position of the display area of the stencil (label) in real space, the position of the display area of the stencil (label) in the height direction (z-axis direction) may be derived.
 ステンシルによる表示領域201が長方形であり、その長辺および短辺の実空間の長さが物品管理装置1200に予め記憶されている場合を例に挙げ、図20Aと図20Bとを用いて第6の例を説明する。なお、前述したように、第1の撮像装置のセンサの画素数の情報と、当該センサのサイズの情報と、撮影時に用いられる光学倍率ごとに焦点距離と、が物品管理装置1200に予め記憶されている。焦点距離は、撮像時に決められる情報である。 Taking as an example a case where the stencil display area 201 is a rectangle and the real space lengths of the long side and short side are stored in advance in the article management device 1200, the sixth example will be explained using FIG. 20A and FIG. An example will be explained. Note that, as described above, information on the number of pixels of the sensor of the first imaging device, information on the size of the sensor, and focal length for each optical magnification used at the time of photographing are stored in advance in the article management device 1200. ing. The focal length is information determined at the time of imaging.
 図20Aは、ステンシルによる表示領域201を含む第1の撮像画像の一例を示す図である。ステンシルによる表示領域201は正面から撮像されると、第1の撮像画像において長方形になる。一方、ステンシルによる表示領域201は斜めから撮像されると、図20Aの破線(仮想線)のように第1の撮像画像において不等辺四角形となる場合がある。図20Bは、第1の撮像装置の内部とステンシルによる表示領域201との幾何学的関係の一例を示す図である。図20Bにおいて、まず、位置導出部1206は、撮像素子2002に撮像されたステンシルによる表示領域201’の四隅の頂点002a~2002dの位置を特定する。次に、位置導出部1206は、ステンシルによる表示領域201’の四隅の頂点2002a~2002dと、主点FPと、を結ぶ直線を、ステンシルによる表示領域201側に延長した直線2003a~2003dを特定する。次に、位置導出部1206は、主点FPが、頭頂点であり、直線2003a~2003dが、主点FPを一端とする4つの辺であり、底面の寸法が、ステンシルによる表示領域201(長方形)の長辺および短辺の実空間の長さである四角錘2001を特定する。前述したように、ステンシルによる表示領域201を長方形としたときの当該長方形の長辺および短辺の実空間の長さは、物品管理装置1200に予め記憶されている。位置導出部1206は、このようにして特定した四角錘2001に基づいて、ステンシルによる表示領域201と主点FP(第1の撮像装置)との3次元的な位置関係を導出する。 FIG. 20A is a diagram showing an example of a first captured image including a display area 201 formed by a stencil. When the display area 201 formed by the stencil is imaged from the front, it becomes a rectangle in the first captured image. On the other hand, when the display area 201 formed by the stencil is imaged from an oblique direction, it may become a scalene quadrilateral in the first captured image, as shown by the broken line (virtual line) in FIG. 20A. FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of the geometrical relationship between the inside of the first imaging device and the display area 201 formed by the stencil. In FIG. 20B, the position deriving unit 1206 first specifies the positions of the four corner vertices 002a to 2002d of the stencil display area 201' imaged by the image sensor 2002. Next, the position deriving unit 1206 specifies straight lines 2003a to 2003d, which are the straight lines connecting the four corner vertices 2002a to 2002d of the stencil display area 201' and the principal point FP, and are extended toward the stencil display area 201 side. . Next, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates that the principal point FP is the vertex of the head, the straight lines 2003a to 2003d are the four sides with the principal point FP as one end, and the bottom dimension is the display area 201 (rectangular) formed by the stencil. ) is specified as the length of the real space of the long side and short side of the square pyramid 2001. As described above, when the stencil display area 201 is a rectangle, the real space lengths of the long sides and short sides of the rectangle are stored in advance in the article management device 1200. The position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional positional relationship between the stencil display area 201 and the principal point FP (first imaging device) based on the square pyramid 2001 identified in this manner.
 ここでは、説明を容易にするため、ステンシルによる表示領域の形状が、予め寸法がわかっている長方形である場合を例示した。しかしながら、第6の例の手法において、第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出する対象となる表示領域の形状は、長方形である場合に限定されない。例えば、形状と大きさとが予めわかっている文字、記号、マークなどの表示であっても、図20Bに示すステンシルによる表示領域201を当該表示の表示領域に置き替えれば、当該表示の位置と主点(第1の撮像装置)との3次元的な位置関係を導出することができる。 Here, for ease of explanation, an example is given in which the shape of the display area by the stencil is a rectangle whose dimensions are known in advance. However, in the method of the sixth example, the shape of the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is not limited to a rectangle. For example, even if the shape and size of a character, symbol, mark, etc. are known in advance, if the stencil display area 201 shown in FIG. 20B is replaced with the display area of the display, the position and main A three-dimensional positional relationship with the point (first imaging device) can be derived.
 更には、ここでは、第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出する対象となる表示領域が平面である場合を例示した。しかしながら、第6の例の手法において、第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出する対象となる表示領域は平面に限定されない。当該表示領域の面の形状が既知であれば、当該表示領域と第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出することができる。例えば、円柱状の物品の表面になされた表示の表示領域と、第1の撮像装置と、の三次元的な位置関係を位置導出部1206が導出する場合には、図20Bを参照しながら説明した長方形の長辺および短辺の寸法に代えて、当該表示領域の形状および寸法と、当該表示領域の表示面の曲率と、が予め物品管理装置1200に記憶されていればよい。これらの情報によって、図20Bを参照しながら説明した第6の例の手法における四角錘の底面に相当するものを特定することができるからである。 Furthermore, here, a case has been exemplified in which the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is a plane. However, in the method of the sixth example, the display area from which the three-dimensional positional relationship with the first imaging device is derived is not limited to a plane. If the shape of the surface of the display area is known, the three-dimensional positional relationship between the display area and the first imaging device can be derived. For example, when the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional positional relationship between the display area of the display made on the surface of the cylindrical article and the first imaging device, this will be explained with reference to FIG. 20B. Instead of the dimensions of the long side and short side of the rectangle, the shape and dimensions of the display area and the curvature of the display surface of the display area may be stored in advance in the article management device 1200. This is because, based on this information, it is possible to specify what corresponds to the bottom surface of the square pyramid in the method of the sixth example described with reference to FIG. 20B.
 図17の説明に戻り、ステップS1708において、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を特定することができないと判定された場合には、ステップS1712の処理が実行される。ステップS1712において、出力部1208は、厚板の三次元位置を特定することができないことを示す情報と、当該厚板を撮像した第1の撮像装置のIDとを出力する。例えば、出力部1208は、厚板の三次元位置を特定することができないことを示す情報と、当該厚板を撮像した第1の撮像装置のIDとを、コンピュータディスプレイに表示させる。これらの情報が出力されると、オペレータ(作業員)は、該当する第1の撮像装置が存在する位置まで出向き、該当する厚板の三次元位置を特定する。また、オペレータ(作業員)は、該当する第1の撮像装置のプレビュー画像から、該当する厚板の三次元位置を特定してもよい。 Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, if it is determined in step S1708 that the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the display area by the stencil (label) cannot be specified, the process in step S1712 is executed. Ru. In step S1712, the output unit 1208 outputs information indicating that the three-dimensional position of the plank cannot be specified and the ID of the first imaging device that imaged the plank. For example, the output unit 1208 causes the computer display to display information indicating that the three-dimensional position of the plank cannot be specified and the ID of the first imaging device that captured the image of the plank. When these pieces of information are output, the operator (worker) goes to the location where the corresponding first imaging device is located and specifies the three-dimensional position of the corresponding plank. Further, the operator (worker) may specify the three-dimensional position of the corresponding thick plate from the preview image of the corresponding first imaging device.
 次に、ステップS1713において、記憶部1207は、オペレータ(作業員)により特定された厚板の三次元位置を示す情報を入力し、当該厚板に対する情報として管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄の物品位置の欄に記憶されている情報を、当該入力した情報に更新する。尚、厚板の三次元位置を示す情報の入力の形態として、物品管理装置1200のユーザインターフェースの操作による入力、外部装置から送信された情報の受信、および可搬型の記憶媒体に記憶された情報の読み出しのうち、少なくとも1つを採用することができる。そして、図17のフローチャートによる処理が終了する。 Next, in step S1713, the storage unit 1207 inputs information indicating the three-dimensional position of the thick plate specified by the operator (worker), and stores it in the non-product display column of the management table 1300 as information for the thick plate. The information stored in the item position column is updated to the input information. Note that the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the plank can be input in the following ways: input by operating the user interface of the article management device 1200, receiving information transmitted from an external device, and information stored in a portable storage medium. At least one of these readings can be adopted. Then, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 17 ends.
<まとめ>
 以上のように本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、厚板に表示されている情報であって、当該厚板の製造メーカによって管理されている情報がステンシル(ラベル)により表示された表示領域を含む領域の第1の撮像画像を取得する。物品管理装置1200は、当該取得した第1の撮像画像と、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置と、に基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置を導出し、当該三次元位置を示す情報を、当該厚板のIDと関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する。従って、例えば、各種の搬送装置(輸送船400、輸送車両700、搬送テーブル1001等)を用いて厚板を搬送したり、厚板を作業員が搬送したりする場合や、置場番地が定められていない置場に厚板が置かれる場合や、厚板が積み重ねられて置かれる場合であっても、厚板の位置を管理することができる。よって、厚板の位置を適切に管理することができる。
<Summary>
As described above, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 is configured to display a display area in which information displayed on a thick plate and managed by the manufacturer of the thick plate is displayed using a stencil (label). A first captured image of the area including the area is acquired. The article management device 1200 determines the three-dimensional position of the display area of the stencil (label) based on the acquired first captured image and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image. Information indicating the three-dimensional position is stored in a storage medium in association with the ID of the plank. Therefore, for example, when a thick plate is transported using various transport devices (transport ship 400, transport vehicle 700, transport table 1001, etc.) or when a worker transports a thick board, or when a storage lot address is determined, The position of the planks can be managed even when the planks are placed in an empty storage area or when the planks are stacked. Therefore, the position of the thick plate can be appropriately managed.
 また、本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置と、厚板のIDとが、相互に関連付けられて記憶媒体に既に記憶されている場合に、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置を新たに導出した場合、記憶媒体に既に記憶されているステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置を、新たに導出した三次元位置に更新する。したがって、時間の経過と共に存在する位置(場所)が変わる厚板の位置の追跡精度を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the article management device 1200 uses the stencil (label) when the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) and the ID of the thick plate are already stored in the storage medium in association with each other. When the three-dimensional position of the display area based on the (label) is newly derived, the three-dimensional position of the display area based on the stencil (label) already stored in the storage medium is updated to the newly derived three-dimensional position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the tracking accuracy of the position of the plank whose position (location) changes with the passage of time.
 また、本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、第1の撮像画像に基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域に表示されている情報(ID305、312)を認識する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、認識した情報と、管理テーブル1300に記憶されている情報(ID)とを照合し、照合した結果に基づいて、厚板を特定する。従って、位置の管理対象となる厚板そのものを、第1の撮像画像に基づいて確実に特定することができる。よって、例えば、搬送機器の動作に基づいて、厚板の三次元位置を特定する場合に比べ、厚板の位置を高精度に特定することができる。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 recognizes the information (ID305, 312) displayed in the stencil (label) display area based on the first captured image. The article management device 1200 then collates the recognized information with the information (ID) stored in the management table 1300, and identifies the thick plate based on the collation result. Therefore, the plank itself whose position is to be managed can be reliably specified based on the first captured image. Therefore, for example, the position of the thick plate can be specified with high precision compared to the case where the three-dimensional position of the thick plate is specified based on the operation of the transport device.
 また、本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置と異なる第2の撮像装置により撮像された第2の撮像画像を取得する。第2の撮像画像には、第1の撮像画像と、(位置の管理対象となる)厚板とが含まれる。物品管理装置1200は、当該取得した第2の撮像画像と、第2の撮像装置の位置と、に基づいて、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置を導出する。そして、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシルによる表示領域201の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置と、第1の撮像画像と、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置と、に基づいて、ステンシルによる表示領域201の三次元位置を、厚板の三次元位置として導出する。従って、第1の撮像画像や第1の撮像画像が備えるセンサを用いても、厚板の高さ方向の位置を導出することができない場合でも、厚板の位置を管理することができる。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the article management device 1200 acquires a second captured image captured by a second imaging device different from the first imaging device that captured the first captured image. The second captured image includes the first captured image and the plank (whose position is to be managed). The article management device 1200 derives the position of the stencil display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction) based on the acquired second captured image and the position of the second imaging device. The article management device 1200 then stores the position of the stencil display area 201 in the height direction (z-axis direction), the first captured image, and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image. , the three-dimensional position of the display area 201 by the stencil is derived as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate. Therefore, even if the position of the thick plate in the height direction cannot be derived even if the first captured image or the sensor included in the first captured image is used, the position of the thick plate can be managed.
 また、本実施形態では、ステンシルによる表示およびラベルによる表示を、人が識別可能な情報とする。従って、オペレータ(作業員)による現品管理が容易になる。よって、現品管理の利便性が向上する。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the stencil display and the label display are information that can be identified by humans. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator (worker) to manage the actual product. Therefore, the convenience of managing the actual item is improved.
 また、本実施形態では、ステンシルによる表示およびラベルによる表示に、厚板ごとに個別に定められる情報(厚板に固有の情報)が含まれるようにした。従って、第1の撮像画像に基づいて、厚板を一意に識別することができる。よって、厚板の識別を容易に且つ迅速に行うことができる。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the stencil display and the label display include information that is individually determined for each thick plate (information unique to the thick plate). Therefore, the plank can be uniquely identified based on the first captured image. Therefore, thick plates can be easily and quickly identified.
 また、本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置として、三次元座標(x-y-z座標)を導出する。従って、例えば、複数の厚板が積み重ねられている場合であっても、厚板の位置を管理することができる。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the article management device 1200 derives three-dimensional coordinates (xyz coordinates) as the position of the display area by the stencil (label). Therefore, for example, even if a plurality of planks are stacked on top of each other, the positions of the planks can be managed.
<変形例>
<<第1の変形例>>
 ステップS1709において第1の撮像画像に含まれるステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置を導出する方法は、図18を参照しながら説明した手法に限定されない。例えば、位置導出部1206は、管理テーブル1300において物品内位置を定める際の原点の位置を、第1の撮像画像から導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、導出した原点の位置と、管理テーブル1300の物品内位置の欄に記憶されている情報と、に基づいて、第1の撮像画像に含まれるステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置を導出する。このようにして第1の撮像画像に含まれるステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置を導出する手法の一例を、ステンシルによる表示領域201を例に挙げて説明する。
<Modified example>
<<First modification example>>
The method for deriving the position of the display area based on the stencil (label) included in the first captured image in step S1709 is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG. 18. For example, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the position of the origin when determining the position within the article in the management table 1300 from the first captured image. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 displays the stencil (label) included in the first captured image based on the derived origin position and the information stored in the column of the position within the article of the management table 1300. Derive the location of the region. An example of a method for deriving the position of the stencil (label) display area included in the first captured image in this manner will be described using the stencil display area 201 as an example.
 図21は、ステンシルによる表示領域201の位置を導出する方法の一例を説明する図である。図21では、図18と同様に、点Sのx-y-z座標S(x,y,z)を、ステンシルによる表示領域201の位置として導出する場合を例示する。図14を参照しながら説明したように、ステンシルの物品内位置は、図2に示す頂点203を原点とし、当該頂点203から、厚板の幅方向に沿う方向をy軸の正の方向、厚板の長さ方向に沿う方向をx軸の正の方向とするx-y座標で表される。従って、図21の点Eの位置が、ステンシルの物品内位置の原点となる。点Fは、厚板の頂点のうち、点Eに対して幅方向(y軸方向)に並ぶ点である(点Eと点Fとで厚板の幅方向に沿う一辺が形成される)。点Tは、線分EFに対する点Pの垂線の足(点Pの垂線と線分EFとの交点)である。点Pおよび点Oは、図18に示したものと同じである。 FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a method for deriving the position of the display area 201 using a stencil. Similar to FIG. 18, FIG. 21 exemplifies a case where the xyz coordinates S (x s , y s , z s ) of the point S are derived as the position of the display area 201 by the stencil. As explained with reference to FIG. 14, the position of the stencil in the article is determined from the vertex 203 shown in FIG. It is expressed in xy coordinates with the direction along the length of the plate being the positive direction of the x-axis. Therefore, the position of point E in FIG. 21 is the origin of the position of the stencil within the article. Point F is a point among the vertices of the thick plate that is lined up in the width direction (y-axis direction) with respect to point E (point E and point F form one side along the width direction of the thick plate). Point T is the foot of the perpendicular line of point P to line segment EF (the intersection of the perpendicular line of point P and line segment EF). Point P and point O are the same as shown in FIG.
 図21において、線分PTの長さをhとする。また、線分PFの長さをhとし、∠FPTをθ(rad)とし、線分PEの長さをhとし、∠EPTをθ(rad)とし、∠EPFをθ(rad)(θ=θ+θ)とする。また、線分FTの長さをw01とし、線分ETの長さをw02とする。 In FIG. 21, the length of the line segment PT is h p . Also, the length of line segment PF is h 1 , ∠FPT is θ 1 (rad), the length of line segment PE is h 2 , ∠EPT is θ 2 (rad), and ∠EPF is θ (rad). ) (θ=θ 12 ). Also, let the length of the line segment FT be w 01 and the length of the line segment ET be w 02 .
 そうすると、点Eのx座標xは、点Pのx座標xに、線分OTの長さlを加算した値(x=x+l)になる。点Eのy座標yは、点Pのy座標yから、線分ETの長さwo2を減算した値(y=y-wo2)になる。従って、線分OTの長さlと、線分ETの長さwo2とが導出されれば、点Eの位置(ステンシルの物品内位置の原点)のx-y座標(x,y)が導出される。 Then, the x coordinate x e of point E becomes the value obtained by adding the length l p of the line segment OT to the x coordinate x p of point P (x e = x p + l p ). The y coordinate y e of the point E is the value obtained by subtracting the length w o2 of the line segment ET from the y coordinate y p of the point P (y e =y p - w o2 ). Therefore, if the length l p of the line segment OT and the length w o2 of the line segment ET are derived, the xy coordinates (x e , y e ) is derived.
 線分OTの長さlは、以下の(5)式で表される。
 l=√(h -H)=√(h cosθ-H)=√(h cosθ-H) ・・・(5)
 線分ETの長さwo2は、以下の(6)式で表される。
 wo2=hsinθ ・・・(6)
 従って、例えば、線分PEの長さhおよび∠EPT(=θ)が導出されれば、線分OTの長さlおよび線分ETの長さwo2が導出される。尚、線分OPの長さHは、図18を参照しながら説明したようにして導出される。
The length l p of the line segment OT is expressed by the following equation (5).
l p =√(h p 2 - H 2 )=√(h 1 2 cos 2 θ 1 - H 2 )=√(h 2 2 cos 2 θ 2 - H 2 )...(5)
The length w o2 of the line segment ET is expressed by the following equation (6).
w o2 = h 2 sin θ 2 ...(6)
Therefore, for example, if the length h 2 and ∠EPT (=θ 2 ) of the line segment PE are derived, the length l p of the line segment OT and the length w o2 of the line segment ET are derived. Note that the length H of the line segment OP is derived as described with reference to FIG. 18.
 第1の撮像画像における点Tの位置は、第1の撮像画像における線分EF上の位置であって、撮像時の水平画角(y軸方向の画角)の中心に対応する位置となる。∠EPT(=θ)は、例えば、ステップS1701で取得した第1の撮像画像における点Eおよび点Tの位置と、当該第1の撮像画像の主点と、に基づいて定められる。第1の撮像画像における点Eと、第1の撮像画像の主点とを結ぶ直線により、線分PEが延びる方向が特定される。第1の撮像画像における点Tと、第1の撮像画像の主点とを結ぶ直線により、線分PTが延びる方向が特定される。∠EPT(=θ)は、線分PEが延びる方向と、線分PTが延びる方向と、に基づいて定められる。
 線分PEの長さhは、例えば、第1の撮像装置が備える測距センサ(例えばTOF(Time-of-Flight)方式の測距センサ)を用いて導出される。この他、線分OPの長さHと、∠OPEとに基づいて、線分PEの長さhを導出してもよい。
The position of point T in the first captured image is a position on the line segment EF in the first captured image, and corresponds to the center of the horizontal angle of view (angle of view in the y-axis direction) at the time of imaging. . ∠EPT (=θ 2 ) is determined, for example, based on the positions of point E and point T in the first captured image acquired in step S1701 and the principal point of the first captured image. The direction in which the line segment PE extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point E in the first captured image and the principal point of the first captured image. The direction in which the line segment PT extends is specified by the straight line connecting the point T in the first captured image and the principal point of the first captured image. ∠EPT (=θ 2 ) is determined based on the direction in which line segment PE extends and the direction in which line segment PT extends.
The length h2 of the line segment PE is derived, for example, using a distance measurement sensor (for example, a TOF (Time-of-Flight) distance measurement sensor) included in the first imaging device. In addition, the length h2 of the line segment PE may be derived based on the length H of the line segment OP and ∠OPE.
 以上のようにして、点Eのx座標xおよびy座標yが導出される。そして、位置導出部1206は、ステップS1705で特定された厚板のラベルの情報として管理テーブル1300の物品内位置の欄に記憶されている情報から、点Sに対応する位置のx-y座標(Ls10,Ws10)を読み出す。そして、位置導出部1206は、点Eのx座標xにLS10を加算した値を点Sのx座標xとして導出する(x=x+LS10)。また、位置導出部1206は、点Eのy座標xにWS10を加算した値を点Sのy座標yとして導出する(y=y+WS10)。 As described above, the x coordinate x e and the y coordinate y e of point E are derived. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the xy coordinates ( Ls10, Ws10) are read. Then, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the value obtained by adding LS10 to the x coordinate x e of point E as the x coordinate x s of point S (x s =x e +LS10). Furthermore, the position deriving unit 1206 derives the value obtained by adding WS10 to the y coordinate x y of point E as the y coordinate y s of point S (y s = y e +WS10).
 また、例えば、厚板が置かれている場所、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の位置、および厚板が置かれている方向の少なくとも1つによっては、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域と、第1の撮像装置と、の幾何学的な位置関係を表す数式が図18および図21を参照しながら説明した式にならない場合がある。例えば、複数の厚板が貨車に積み重ねられており、且つ、当該複数の厚板の一部を撮像装置で撮像することができない場合、当該複数の厚板のうちの最も上に置かれている厚板の高さ方向の位置が定まらない場合がある。また、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域と、第1の撮像装置と、の幾何学的な位置関係を表す数式が複雑になる場合がある。そこで、例えば、第1の撮像装置は、輝度画像および距離画像を第1の撮像画像として撮像してもよい。なお、輝度画像は、本実施形態でこれまでに説明した撮像画像である。輝度画像は、被写体からの反射光の強度(被写体の明るさ)の情報を有し、撮像装置から被写体までの距離の情報を有していない。距離画像は、撮像装置から被写体までの距離の情報を有する。尚、第1の撮像装置は、輝度画像の画素の位置と、距離画像の画素の位置と、が相互に対応するように、輝度画像および距離画像を撮像する。また、距離画像を測定する方法としては、TOF(Time Of Flight)方式やパターン照射方式等、公知の方法をもちいればよい。 For example, depending on at least one of the location where the plank is placed, the position of the stencil (label) display area, and the direction in which the plank is placed, the stencil (label) display area and the first There are cases where the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the imaging device and the expression described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 21 is not satisfied. For example, if a plurality of planks are stacked on a freight car and some of the plurality of planks cannot be imaged by the imaging device, the topmost of the plurality of planks is placed on top of the plurality of planks. The height position of the plank may not be determined. Further, the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the display area formed by the stencil (label) and the first imaging device may become complicated. Therefore, for example, the first imaging device may capture the luminance image and the distance image as the first captured images. Note that the brightness image is the captured image described so far in this embodiment. The brightness image has information on the intensity of reflected light from the subject (brightness of the subject), but does not have information on the distance from the imaging device to the subject. The distance image has information on the distance from the imaging device to the subject. Note that the first imaging device images the brightness image and the distance image so that the positions of the pixels of the brightness image and the positions of the pixels of the distance image correspond to each other. Further, as a method for measuring a distance image, a known method such as a TOF (Time Of Flight) method or a pattern irradiation method may be used.
 このようにする場合、位置導出部1206は、輝度画像に基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域に対応する画素を特定する。例えば、位置導出部1206は、ステンシル(ラベル)の画像を予めテンプレート画像として記憶する。位置導出部1206は、輝度画像とテンプレート画像とのパターンマッチングを行うことにより、輝度画像から、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域を特定する。位置導出部1206は、距離画像の領域のうち、輝度画像から特定したステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域に対応する領域を特定する。位置導出部1206は、距離画像から特定した領域の画素値を抽出する。距離画像の画素値は、第1の撮像装置から被写体までの距離を示す値である。このようにして距離画像から抽出した画素値は、第1撮像装置からステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域までの距離を示す。このようにして位置導出部1206は、距離画像から抽出した画素値に基づいて、第1の撮像装置からステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の所定の位置までの距離を得ることができる。位置導出部206は、第1の撮像装置の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)と、第1の撮像画像を撮像したときの第1の撮像装置の姿勢と、第1の撮像装置からステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の所定の位置までの距離と、に基づいて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の所定の位置の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)を導出する。 In this case, the position derivation unit 1206 identifies pixels corresponding to the display area of the stencil (label) based on the luminance image. For example, the position derivation unit 1206 stores an image of a stencil (label) in advance as a template image. The position derivation unit 1206 specifies a display area for a stencil (label) from the brightness image by performing pattern matching between the brightness image and the template image. The position derivation unit 1206 specifies an area of the range image that corresponds to the display area of the stencil (label) specified from the brightness image. The position derivation unit 1206 extracts pixel values of the specified area from the distance image. The pixel value of the distance image is a value indicating the distance from the first imaging device to the subject. The pixel value extracted from the distance image in this manner indicates the distance from the first imaging device to the display area defined by the stencil (label). In this manner, the position deriving unit 1206 can obtain the distance from the first imaging device to the predetermined position of the display area defined by the stencil (label) based on the pixel values extracted from the distance image. The position deriving unit 206 calculates the three-dimensional position (x-y-z coordinates) of the first imaging device, the attitude of the first imaging device when capturing the first captured image, and the information from the first imaging device. The three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the predetermined position in the display area by the stencil (label) is derived based on the distance to the predetermined position in the display area by the stencil (label).
<<第2の変形例>>
 本実施形態のように、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、注文番号307、規格311、ID312、サイズ313、納期314、および需要家コード315を、人が識別可能な情報とすれば、オペレータ(作業員)による現品管理が容易になるので好ましい。しかしながら、需要家名302、規格303、サイズ304、ID305、需要家コード306、注文番号307、規格311、ID312、サイズ313、納期314、および需要家コード315の少なくとも1つを、バーコードや2次元コードのように、人が識別可能でない情報に変換(エンコード)された情報としてもよい。
<<Second variant>>
As in this embodiment, a person identifies the customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, order number 307, standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315. It is preferable if the information is available because it makes it easier for the operator (worker) to manage the actual product. However, at least one of the customer name 302, standard 303, size 304, ID 305, customer code 306, order number 307, standard 311, ID 312, size 313, delivery date 314, and customer code 315 may be changed to a bar code or It may also be information that is converted (encoded) into information that cannot be identified by humans, such as a dimensional code.
<<第3の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、図3A、図3Bに示すように、ステンシルにより表示されるID305と、ラベルにより表示されるID312とが同じである場合を例示した。しかしながら、これらのIDの表現および記載内容が異なる場合がある。例えば、IDにおいて“ハイフン”がない形式もある。このような場合、これらのID(ステンシルによるID、ラベルによるID)が同一の厚板に対するものであることを示す情報を管理テーブル1300に記憶させる。ID以外の表示項目についても、同一の表示項目の表現および記載内容が、ステンシルによる表示およびラベルによる表示で異なる場合がある。例えば、ステンシルおよびラベルの双方に規格が表示される場合、例えば、ラベルには規格の略称が表示される場合がある。また、ステンシルによる表示とラベルによる表示とで需要者コードの桁数が異なる場合があるが、需要者コードは製造メーカで管理されている。また、サイズについても、寸法の全ての桁を示さない場合がある。このような場合にも、それら異なる表現および記載内容が同等の意味であることを示す情報を管理テーブル1300に記憶させる。
<<Third modification example>>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, a case has been exemplified in which the ID 305 displayed by the stencil and the ID 312 displayed by the label are the same. However, the expressions and written contents of these IDs may differ. For example, some formats do not have a "hyphen" in the ID. In such a case, information indicating that these IDs (stencil ID, label ID) are for the same thick plate is stored in the management table 1300. Regarding display items other than IDs, the expression and written content of the same display item may be different depending on whether it is displayed using a stencil or displayed using a label. For example, if a standard is displayed on both the stencil and the label, the abbreviation of the standard may be displayed on the label, for example. Further, although the number of digits of the customer code may differ depending on whether it is displayed using a stencil or a label, the customer code is managed by the manufacturer. Also, regarding sizes, not all digits of dimensions may be shown. Even in such a case, information indicating that the different expressions and written contents have the same meaning is stored in the management table 1300.
<<第4の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)を、厚板の三次元位置として導出する場合を例示した。しかしながら、厚板の三次元位置は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)に限定されない。例えば、物品管理装置1200は、厚板の表面に表示されている1つの要素のみを認識し、認識した要素の位置(例えば重心または図心)のx-y-z座標を、厚板の三次元位置としてもよい。要素は、文字、数字、記号、マーク等、1つの情報として扱われる情報である。例えば、要素は、認識部1202で1つの情報として認識される情報である。物品管理装置1200は、例えば、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素のうちの1つの要素を認識してもよい。また、物品管理装置1200は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素とは別の1つの要素を認識してもよい。物品管理装置1200は、このように1つの要素の三次元位置を厚板の三次元位置として導出する場合、例えば、認識した1つの要素の外接矩形をステンシルによる表示領域201と見なして本実施形態で説明した処理を行う。
<<Fourth variation>>
In this embodiment, a case has been exemplified in which the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label) is derived as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate. However, the three-dimensional position of the plank is not limited to the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) of the display area by the stencil (label). For example, the article management device 1200 recognizes only one element displayed on the surface of a plank, and converts the xyz coordinates of the position (for example, the center of gravity or centroid) of the recognized element into the three-dimensional coordinates of the plank. It may also be the original position. An element is information that is treated as a single piece of information, such as letters, numbers, symbols, and marks. For example, an element is information that is recognized as one piece of information by the recognition unit 1202. For example, the article management device 1200 may recognize one element among the components of a display item in a stencil (label) display. Furthermore, the article management device 1200 may recognize one element other than the constituent elements of the display items in the stencil (label) display. When the article management device 1200 derives the three-dimensional position of one element as the three-dimensional position of the thick plate in this way, for example, the recognized circumscribed rectangle of one element is regarded as the display area 201 by the stencil, and the present embodiment Perform the processing described in .
 また、物品管理装置1200は、厚板の表面に表示されている2つ以上の要素のみを認識してもよい。厚板の表面に表示されている2つ以上の要素は、例えば、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素のうちの2つ以上の構成要素である。ただし、厚板の表面に表示されている2つ以上の要素は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の全ての構成要素ではないものとする。また、厚板の表面に表示されている2つ以上の要素は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示における表示項目の構成要素とは別の要素であってもよい。物品管理装置1200は、このように2つ以上の要素の三次元位置を厚板の三次元位置として導出する場合、例えば、厚板の表面に表示されている2つ以上の要素の外接矩形をステンシルによる表示領域201と見なして本実施形態で説明した処理を行う。 Additionally, the article management device 1200 may recognize only two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank. The two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank are, for example, two or more of the components of the display item in a stencil (label) display. However, the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank are not all of the components of the display item in the stencil (label) display. Furthermore, the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank may be elements different from the constituent elements of the displayed items in the stencil (label) display. When deriving the three-dimensional positions of two or more elements as the three-dimensional positions of the plank in this way, the article management device 1200, for example, calculates the circumscribed rectangle of the two or more elements displayed on the surface of the plank. The processing described in this embodiment is performed by regarding the display area 201 as a stencil display area.
 また、同じ大きさの文字であっても、撮像装置から遠い位置にある文字の方が、撮像装置から近い位置にある文字よりも小さく撮像される。このことを利用して位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像画像に映し出されている情報の位置および大きさに基づいて、物品の三次元位置を導出してもよい。 Furthermore, even if the characters are of the same size, characters located farther from the imaging device are imaged smaller than characters located closer to the imaging device. Taking advantage of this, the position deriving unit 1206 may derive the three-dimensional position of the article based on the position and size of the information displayed in the first captured image.
<<第5の変形例>>
 また、物品管理装置1200は、方向導出部を有していてもよい。方向導出部は、物品の一表面における複数の三次元位置(x-y-z)に基づいて、当該物品が置かれている方向を特定する情報を導出する。例えば、方向導出部は、図14に示す外接矩形の2つの頂点1401a、1401bの三次元位置(x-y-z座標)に基づいて、厚板の板面と基準面とのなす角度を導出する。基準面は、例えば地面である。地面以外の面が基準面であってもよい。この場合、厚板の板面と基準面とのなす角度が、物品が置かれている方向を特定する情報の一例である。ただし、物品が置かれている方向を特定する情報は、物品の板面と基準面とのなす角度に限定されない。例えば、物品の板面に代えて、物品の対称軸(中心軸)が用いられてもよい。
<<Fifth modification example>>
Furthermore, the article management device 1200 may include a direction derivation section. The direction derivation unit derives information specifying the direction in which the article is placed based on a plurality of three-dimensional positions (xyz) on one surface of the article. For example, the direction derivation unit derives the angle between the plate surface of the thick plate and the reference plane based on the three-dimensional positions (xyz coordinates) of the two vertices 1401a and 1401b of the circumscribed rectangle shown in FIG. do. The reference plane is, for example, the ground. The reference surface may be a surface other than the ground. In this case, the angle between the plate surface of the thick plate and the reference plane is an example of information that specifies the direction in which the article is placed. However, the information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is not limited to the angle between the plate surface of the article and the reference plane. For example, the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the article may be used instead of the plate surface of the article.
 また、方向導出部は、図14に示す外接矩形の2つの頂点1401a、1401bに代えてまたは加えて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示項目の構成要素のうち、2つ以上の構成要素の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)を用いてもよい。また、方向導出部は、これらの三次元位置(x-y-z座標)に代えてまたは加えて、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域とは別の領域に表示された情報の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)を用いてもよい。 In addition, instead of or in addition to the two vertices 1401a and 1401b of the circumscribed rectangle shown in FIG. (xyz coordinates) may also be used. In addition, instead of or in addition to these three-dimensional positions (xyz coordinates), the direction deriving unit calculates the three-dimensional position (x -yz coordinates) may also be used.
 また、本変形例が採用される場合、図13に示す管理テーブル1300の非現品表示の欄に、物品が置かれている方向を特定する情報が記憶される欄が追加される。以下の説明では、物品が置かれている方向を特定する情報が記憶される欄を、物品方向の欄と称する。記憶部1207は、厚板が置かれている方向を特定する情報を、管理テーブル1300の当該厚板に対応する物品方向の欄に記憶する。これにより、厚板が置かれている方向を特定する情報と、当該厚板のIDおよび三次元位置等とが相互に関連付けて記憶される。 Furthermore, when this modification is adopted, a column storing information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is added to the non-product display column of the management table 1300 shown in FIG. 13. In the following description, the column in which information specifying the direction in which the article is placed is stored will be referred to as the article direction column. The storage unit 1207 stores information specifying the direction in which the thick plate is placed in the article direction column corresponding to the thick plate in the management table 1300. As a result, information specifying the direction in which the plank is placed, and the ID, three-dimensional position, etc. of the plank are stored in association with each other.
 尚、厚板の板面が地面に対して傾いている場合、三次元位置(x-y-z座標)の導出対象の位置(点)の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置は、例えば、以下のようにして導出される。まず、位置導出部1206は、レーザ距離計を用いて第1の撮像装置から三次元位置(x-y-z座標)の導出対象の情報(点)までの高さ方向(z軸方向)の距離を導出する。そして、位置導出部1206は、第1の撮像装置の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置から、当該距離を減算した位置を、三次元位置(x-y-z座標)の導出対象の情報(点)の高さ方向(z軸方向)の位置として導出する。 In addition, if the plate surface of the plank is inclined with respect to the ground, the position in the height direction (z-axis direction) of the position (point) to be derived from the three-dimensional position (x-y-z coordinates) is, for example, , is derived as follows. First, the position derivation unit 1206 uses a laser range finder to calculate the height direction (z-axis direction) from the first imaging device to the information (point) from which the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates) is to be derived. Derive the distance. Then, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the position obtained by subtracting the distance from the position of the first imaging device in the height direction (z-axis direction) as information for deriving the three-dimensional position (xyz coordinates). It is derived as the position of (point) in the height direction (z-axis direction).
 また、位置導出部1206は、<<第1の変形例>>で説明したように、輝度画像および距離画像に基づいて、三次元位置(x-y-z座標)の導出対象の情報(点)の三次元位置(x-y-z座標)を導出してもよい。 Furthermore, as explained in <<First Modification>>, the position derivation unit 1206 obtains information (point ) may be derived.
<<第6の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域のx-y-z座標を、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置として導出する場合を例示した。しかしながら、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置は、x-y-z座標に限定されない。例えば、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置は、第1の撮像装置の位置を基準とする相対的な三次元位置であってもよい。このようにする場合、撮像装置の三次元位置を示す点Pの座標(x,y,z)を用いなくてもよい。尚、x-y-z座標の原点を、第1の撮像装置の三次元位置とする場合、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域の三次元位置は、x-y-z座標で表しても、第1の撮像装置の三次元位置を基準とする相対的な三次元位置を示すことになる。
<<Sixth variation>>
In this embodiment, a case has been exemplified in which the xyz coordinates of the display area by the stencil (label) are derived as the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label). However, the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) is not limited to xyz coordinates. For example, the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) may be a relative three-dimensional position with respect to the position of the first imaging device. In this case, it is not necessary to use the coordinates (x p , y p , z p ) of the point P indicating the three-dimensional position of the imaging device. Note that when the origin of the xyz coordinates is the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device, the three-dimensional position of the display area by the stencil (label) may be expressed as the xyz coordinates. This indicates a relative three-dimensional position based on the three-dimensional position of the first imaging device.
<<第7の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、識別情報取得部1210が、認識部1202、入手部1203、照合部1204、および特定部1205を有する場合を例示した。しかしながら、識別情報取得部1210は、位置導出部1206により導出された三次元位置に関連付ける厚板の識別情報を取得していれば、必ずしも、認識部1202、入手部1203、照合部1204、および特定部1205を有している必要はない。識別情報取得部1210は、例えば、認識部1202のみを有していてもよい。また、識別情報取得部1210は、例えば、入手部1203のみを有していてもよい。また、識別情報取得部1210は、例えば、認識部1202と入手部1203のみを有していてもよい。例えば、識別情報取得部1210は、認識部1202により認識されたIDを、厚板の識別情報として取得してもよい。この場合、識別情報取得部1210は、入手部1203、照合部1204および特定部1205を有していなくてもよい。また、例えば、位置の管理対象となる物品が予め1つに限定されている場合、識別情報取得部1210は、入手部1203により入手されたIDを、厚板の識別情報として取得してもよい。この場合、識別情報取得部1210は、認識部1202、照合部1204および特定部1205を有していなくてもよい。また、例えば、識別情報取得部1210は、認識部1202により認識された情報のみから厚板を特定する場合には認識部1202を利用し、位置の管理対象となる物品が予め1つに限定されている場合には入手部1203を利用してもよい。この場合、識別情報取得部1210は、照合部1204および特定部1205を有していなくてもよい(認識部1202および入手部1203のみを有していてもよい)。
<<Seventh variation>>
In this embodiment, the case where the identification information acquisition unit 1210 includes the recognition unit 1202, the acquisition unit 1203, the collation unit 1204, and the identification unit 1205 is illustrated. However, as long as the identification information acquisition unit 1210 has acquired the identification information of the plank to be associated with the three-dimensional position derived by the position derivation unit 1206, the recognition unit 1202, the acquisition unit 1203, the collation unit 1204, and the identification It is not necessary to have the section 1205. For example, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the recognition unit 1202. Further, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the acquisition unit 1203, for example. Further, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may include only the recognition unit 1202 and the acquisition unit 1203, for example. For example, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may acquire the ID recognized by the recognition unit 1202 as the identification information of the thick plate. In this case, the identification information acquisition section 1210 does not need to include the acquisition section 1203, the collation section 1204, and the identification section 1205. Further, for example, if the number of articles whose positions are to be managed is limited to one in advance, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 may acquire the ID acquired by the acquisition unit 1203 as the identification information of the thick plate. . In this case, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 does not need to include the recognition unit 1202, the verification unit 1204, and the identification unit 1205. For example, when identifying a thick plate only from the information recognized by the recognition unit 1202, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 uses the recognition unit 1202, and limits the number of articles whose positions are to be managed to one in advance. In this case, the acquisition unit 1203 may be used. In this case, the identification information acquisition unit 1210 does not need to have the collation unit 1204 and the identification unit 1205 (it may have only the recognition unit 1202 and the acquisition unit 1203).
<<第8の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、管理テーブル1300が物品管理装置1200に記憶されている場合を例示した。しかしながら、管理テーブル1300は、物品管理装置1200の外部にあってもよい。
<<Eighth modification example>>
In this embodiment, the case where the management table 1300 is stored in the article management device 1200 is illustrated. However, the management table 1300 may be located outside the article management device 1200.
<<第9の変形例>>
 本実施形態では、存在する位置が変わる物品が厚板である場合を例示した。しかしながら、存在する位置が変わる物品は、厚板に限定されない。例えば、存在する位置が変わる物品は、厚板以外の製造物であってもよい。存在する位置が変わる物品は、製造者によって管理されている情報が表示されている製造物であってもよい。製造物は、例えば、スラブ、ビレット、薄板コイル、または鋼管であってもよい。また、製造物以外の物品であってもよい。存在する位置が変わる物品は、例えば、コンテナであってもよい。
<<Ninth modification example>>
In this embodiment, the case where the article whose existing position changes is a thick plate is exemplified. However, articles that change their location are not limited to planks. For example, the article whose position changes may be a product other than plank. The article whose existing position changes may be a manufactured product on which information managed by the manufacturer is displayed. The article of manufacture may be, for example, a slab, a billet, a sheet coil, or a steel tube. Moreover, it may be an article other than a manufactured product. The article whose existing position changes may be, for example, a container.
(第2の実施形態)
 次に、第2の実施形態を説明する。第1の実施形態では、物品管理装置1200が、存在する位置が変わる物品の位置を管理する場合を例示した。本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200が、被据付領域に据え付けられた物品の位置を管理する場合について説明する。このように本実施形態では、位置の管理対象の物品は、存在する位置が変わることを前提としない物品であるものとする。このように本実施形態と第1の実施形態とは、位置の管理対象の物品が、存在する位置が変わることを前提とするか否かが異なることによる構成および処理が主として異なる。従って、本実施形態の説明において、第1の実施形態と同一の部分については図1~図21に付した符号と同一の符号を付す等して詳細な説明を省略する。
(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the article management device 1200 manages the position of an article whose existing position changes. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the article management device 1200 manages the positions of articles installed in the installation area. As described above, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the article whose location is to be managed is an article whose location is not subject to change. As described above, the present embodiment and the first embodiment differ mainly in the configuration and processing due to the difference in whether or not the location of the article whose location is to be managed is assumed to change. Therefore, in the description of this embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIGS. 1 to 21, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
 本実施形態の物品管理装置1200で管理される物品として、例えば、図22および図23に示す物品がある。 Examples of articles managed by the article management device 1200 of this embodiment include the articles shown in FIGS. 22 and 23.
 図22は、地面に据え付けられた構造物の鉄骨の一例を示す図である。図22に示す例では、被据付領域は地面である。構造物は、例えば、建物および橋梁である。尚、図22では、表記を簡単にするために、構造物の一部の鉄骨のみを簡略化して示す。また、図22では、地面に据え付けられた構造物の鉄骨を構成する構造材2201a~2201dのうち、梁部材となる構造材2201a~2201bの表面に、当該構造材2201a~2201bを一意に識別するための情報としてID2202a~2202bが表示されている場合を例示する。尚、構造材は、例えば、鋼材等の金属材である。構造材2201a~2201bは、H形鋼である。ID2202a~2202bは、ID305、312に対応する情報である。ID2202a~2202bは、例えば、ステンシル、手書き、および刻印のうち少なくとも何れか1つによって表示される。また、ID2202a~2202bは、ラベルによって表示されてもよい。また、ID2202a~2202b以外の情報が構造材2201a~2201bの表面に表示されていてもよい。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a steel frame of a structure installed on the ground. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the installation area is the ground. Structures are, for example, buildings and bridges. In addition, in FIG. 22, in order to simplify the notation, only a part of the steel frame of the structure is shown in a simplified manner. In addition, in FIG. 22, among the structural members 2201a to 2201d that constitute the steel frame of a structure installed on the ground, the structural members 2201a to 2201b are uniquely identified on the surfaces of the structural members 2201a to 2201b that become beam members. A case where IDs 2202a to 2202b are displayed as information for the purpose will be exemplified. Note that the structural material is, for example, a metal material such as steel. The structural members 2201a to 2201b are H-shaped steel. ID2202a to 2202b are information corresponding to ID305 and ID312. The IDs 2202a to 2202b are displayed, for example, by at least one of a stencil, handwriting, and engraving. Further, the IDs 2202a to 2202b may be displayed using labels. Further, information other than the IDs 2202a to 2202b may be displayed on the surfaces of the structural members 2201a to 2201b.
 尚、図22では、表記を簡単にするため、構造材2201a~2201dのうち構造材2201a~2201bのみにID2202が表示される場合を例示する。しかしながら、構造材2201c~2201dの表面にも、当該構造材2201c~2201dを一意に識別するための情報(ID)を含む情報が表示されていてもよい。また、図22では、構造材2201aおよび構造材2201c~2201dの接続と、構造材2201bおよび構造材2201c~2201dの接続と、がそれぞれ溶接により行われている場合を例示する。しかしながら、構造材2201a~2201dの接続方法は溶接による方法に限定されない。例えば、2つの構造材は、スプライスプレートを用いて接続されてもよい。 Note that, in order to simplify the notation, FIG. 22 exemplifies a case where the ID 2202 is displayed only on the structural members 2201a to 2201b among the structural members 2201a to 2201d. However, information including information (ID) for uniquely identifying the structural members 2201c to 2201d may also be displayed on the surfaces of the structural members 2201c to 2201d. Further, FIG. 22 illustrates a case where the connection between the structural member 2201a and the structural members 2201c to 2201d and the connection between the structural member 2201b and the structural members 2201c to 2201d are each performed by welding. However, the method of connecting the structural members 2201a to 2201d is not limited to welding. For example, two structural members may be connected using a splice plate.
 図22に示す例では、構造材2201a~2201bが据え付けられてから、構造材2201a~2201bの塗装等により構造材2201a~2201bの表面が見えなくなる前に、ID2202a~2202bを含む構造材2201a~2201bの領域の撮像画像が、第1の撮像装置を用いて撮像される。このようにID2202a~2202b(物品を一意に識別するための情報)は、据え付け後に隠れて見えなくなる。第1の撮像画像の役割は、第1の実施形態で説明した第1の撮像画像の役割と同じである。第1の撮像装置として、例えば、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置が用いられる。また、第1の撮像装置として、無人航空機(ドローン)に備わる第1の撮像装置が用いられてもよい。尚、以下の説明では、ID2202a~2202bを含む構造材2201a~2201bの領域を、必要に応じて、構造材のID表示領域と称する。構造材のID表示領域が、第1の実施形態のステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域に対応する。 In the example shown in FIG. 22, after the structural members 2201a to 2201b are installed and before the surfaces of the structural members 2201a to 2201b become invisible due to painting etc. of the structural members 2201a to 2201b, the structural members 2201a to 2201b including IDs 2202a to 2202b are A captured image of the area is captured using the first imaging device. In this way, the IDs 2202a to 2202b (information for uniquely identifying the article) are hidden and become invisible after installation. The role of the first captured image is the same as the role of the first captured image described in the first embodiment. As the first imaging device, for example, a first imaging device held by an operator (worker) is used. Further, as the first imaging device, a first imaging device provided in an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) may be used. In the following description, the area of the structural members 2201a to 2201b including the IDs 2202a to 2202b will be referred to as the ID display area of the structural member, if necessary. The ID display area of the structural material corresponds to the display area by the stencil (label) of the first embodiment.
 図23は、地中に据え付けられた管の一例を示す図である。図23に示す例では、被据付領域は地中である。管は、例えば、金属管、土管、塩ビ管および絶縁管のうちの少なくとも一つである。図23では、地中に据え付けられた管2301a~2301cのうち、管2301aの表面に、当該管2301aを一意に識別するための情報としてID2302が表示されている場合を例示する。ID2302は、ID305、312に対応する情報である。ID2302は、例えば、ステンシル、手書き、および刻印のうち少なくとも何れか1つによって表示される。また、ID2302は、ラベルによって表示されてもよい。また、第1の実施形態で説明したように、ID2302以外の情報が管2301aの表面に表示されていてもよい。 FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a pipe installed underground. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the installation area is underground. The pipe is, for example, at least one of a metal pipe, a clay pipe, a PVC pipe, and an insulated pipe. FIG. 23 illustrates a case where an ID 2302 is displayed on the surface of the pipe 2301a among the pipes 2301a to 2301c installed underground as information for uniquely identifying the pipe 2301a. ID2302 is information corresponding to ID305 and ID312. The ID 2302 is displayed, for example, by at least one of a stencil, handwriting, and engraving. Further, the ID 2302 may be displayed by a label. Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, information other than the ID 2302 may be displayed on the surface of the tube 2301a.
 尚、図23では、表記を簡単にするため、管2301a~2301cのうち管2301aのみにID2302が表示される場合を例示する。しかしながら、管2301b~2301cの表面にも、当該管2301b~2301cを一意に識別するための情報(ID)を含む情報が表示されていてもよい。また、図23では、管2301a~2301cがジョイント部材2303a~2303bを用いて接続される場合を例示する。しかしながら、管2301a~2301cの接続方法はジョイント部材2303a~2303bを用いる方法に限定されない。 Note that, in order to simplify the notation, FIG. 23 exemplifies a case where the ID 2302 is displayed only on the tube 2301a among the tubes 2301a to 2301c. However, information including information (ID) for uniquely identifying the tubes 2301b to 2301c may also be displayed on the surfaces of the tubes 2301b to 2301c. Further, FIG. 23 illustrates a case where pipes 2301a to 2301c are connected using joint members 2303a to 2303b. However, the method of connecting the pipes 2301a to 2301c is not limited to the method using joint members 2303a to 2303b.
 図23に示す例では、管2301aが据え付けられてから、穴2304を埋めて管2301a~2301cが見えなくなる前に、ID2302を含む管2301aの領域の撮像画像が、第1の撮像装置を用いて撮像される。このようにID2302(物品を一意に識別するための情報)は、据え付け後に隠れて見えなくなる。第1の撮像画像の役割は、第1の実施形態で説明した第1の撮像画像の役割と同じである。第1の撮像装置として、例えば、オペレータ(作業員)の手持ちの第1の撮像装置が用いられる。また、第1の撮像装置として、無人航空機(ドローン)に備わる第1の撮像装置が用いられてもよい。尚、以下の説明では、ID2302を含む管2301aの領域の領域を、必要に応じて、管のID表示領域と称する。管のID表示領域が、第1の実施形態のステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域に対応する。 In the example shown in FIG. 23, after the tube 2301a is installed and before the hole 2304 is filled and the tubes 2301a to 2301c become invisible, a captured image of the region of the tube 2301a including the ID 2302 is captured using the first imaging device. Imaged. In this way, the ID 2302 (information for uniquely identifying the article) is hidden and becomes invisible after installation. The role of the first captured image is the same as the role of the first captured image described in the first embodiment. As the first imaging device, for example, a first imaging device held by an operator (worker) is used. Further, as the first imaging device, a first imaging device provided in an unmanned aerial vehicle (drone) may be used. In the following description, the area of the tube 2301a that includes the ID 2302 will be referred to as a tube ID display area, if necessary. The ID display area of the tube corresponds to the stencil (label) display area of the first embodiment.
 本実施形態の物品管理装置1200の機能的な構成の一例は、図12に示した第1の実施形態の物品管理装置1200の機能的な構成の一例と同じである。 An example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the same as an example of the functional configuration of the article management device 1200 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12.
 また、本実施形態の物品管理装置1200により管理される管理テーブルの一例は、図24に示す管理テーブル2400である。尚、図面を含め以下の説明では、物品管理装置1200(記憶部1207)は、構造材(構造材2201a~2201b等)の位置を管理する場合、構造材(構造材2201a~2201b等)の位置を管理するために用いる情報を管理テーブル2400に記憶する。物品管理装置1200(記憶部1207)は、構造材(構造材2201a~2201b等)の位置を管理する場合、管(管2301a等)の位置を管理するために用いる情報を管理テーブル2400に記憶する必要はない。一方、物品管理装置1200(記憶部1207)は、管(管2301a等)の位置を管理する場合、管(管2301a等)の位置を管理するために用いる情報を管理テーブル2400に記憶する。物品管理装置1200(記憶部1207)は、管(管2301a等)の位置を管理する場合、構造材(構造材2201a~2201b等)の位置を管理するために用いる情報を管理テーブル2400に記憶する必要はない。また、図13と同様に、図24においても同一の列における情報が同一の構造材(管)に対する識別情報になる(同一のNo.の下の欄は、同一の構造材(管)に対する識別情報がそれぞれ記憶される欄になる)。以下の説明では、図面を含め、構造材(構造材2201a~2201b等)および管(管2301a等)を、必要に応じて位置固定物品と称する。 Furthermore, an example of the management table managed by the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the management table 2400 shown in FIG. 24. In the following description including the drawings, when managing the positions of structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.), the article management device 1200 (storage unit 1207) Information used to manage the information is stored in the management table 2400. When managing the positions of structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.), the article management device 1200 (storage unit 1207) stores information used for managing the positions of pipes (pipe 2301a, etc.) in the management table 2400. There's no need. On the other hand, when managing the position of a pipe (such as the pipe 2301a), the article management device 1200 (storage unit 1207) stores information used for managing the position of the pipe (such as the pipe 2301a) in the management table 2400. When managing the positions of pipes (pipe 2301a, etc.), the article management device 1200 (storage unit 1207) stores information used for managing the positions of structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.) in the management table 2400. There's no need. Similarly to Fig. 13, the information in the same column in Fig. 24 is the identification information for the same structural material (pipe) (the column under the same No. (It becomes a column where information is stored respectively). In the following description, including the drawings, structural members (structural members 2201a to 2201b, etc.) and pipes (pipe 2301a, etc.) are referred to as position-fixing articles as necessary.
 また、本実施形態の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートは、図25に示すフローチャートである。尚、構造材の位置を管理する際の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートと、管の位置を管理する際の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートと、は別のフローチャートとなる。図25に示すフローチャートが、構造材の位置を管理する際の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートである場合には、図25において「位置固定物品」は「構造材」を意味する。図25に示すフローチャートが、管の位置を管理する際の物品管理装置1200の処理の一例を説明するフローチャートである場合には、図25において「位置固定物品」は「管」を意味する。 Furthermore, a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing of the article management device 1200 of this embodiment is the flowchart shown in FIG. 25. Note that the flowchart explaining an example of the process of the article management device 1200 when managing the position of a structural member is different from the flowchart explaining an example of the process of the article management device 1200 when managing the position of a pipe. It becomes a flowchart. When the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing of the article management device 1200 when managing the position of a structural material, the "position fixed article" in FIG. 25 means the "structural material". . When the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing of the article management apparatus 1200 when managing the position of a pipe, the "position-fixed article" in FIG. 25 means a "pipe."
 図22および図23では、構造材2201a~2201bおよび管2301aにID2202a~2202b、2302のみが表示される場合を例示する。したがって、図24に示す管理テーブル2400において、現品表示の欄には、当該ID2202a~2202b、2302が記憶されるIDの欄のみを示す。しかしながら、構造材2201a~2201bおよび管2301aにID2202a~2202b、2302以外の情報が表示される場合には、当該情報が記憶される欄が、管理テーブル2400の現品表示の欄に含まれていてもよい。 FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate a case where only IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are displayed on structural members 2201a to 2201b and pipe 2301a. Therefore, in the management table 2400 shown in FIG. 24, only the ID column in which the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are stored is shown in the actual item display column. However, if information other than the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 is displayed for the structural members 2201a to 2201b and the pipe 2301a, even if the column in which the information is stored is included in the actual product display column of the management table 2400. good.
 管理テーブル2400の物品位置の欄には、位置固定物品の三次元位置を示す情報が記憶される。物品位置の欄に記憶される情報は、物品管理装置1200により特定された位置固定物品の三次元位置を示す情報である。本実施形態では、構造材のID表示領域の三次元位置、管のID表示領域の三次元位置が、それぞれ、構造材の三次元位置、管の三次元位置である場合を例示する。また、本実施形態では、構造材のID表示領域の三次元位置および管のID表示領域の三次元位置が情報表示位置の一例である。 The article position column of the management table 2400 stores information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article. The information stored in the article position column is information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified by article management device 1200. In this embodiment, a case will be exemplified in which the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the pipe are the three-dimensional position of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the pipe, respectively. Further, in this embodiment, the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the structural material and the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the pipe are examples of information display positions.
 管理テーブル2400の登録時刻の欄には、位置固定物品が現在の位置に置かれた日時(日付と時刻とから定まるタイミング)を示す情報が記憶される。なお、位置固定物品が現在の位置に置かれた日時とは、当該日時を取得するための動作が行われた日時を指すものとする。登録時刻の欄には、例えば、第1の撮像画像の撮像日時が記憶される。しかしながら、登録時刻の欄に記憶される情報は、第1の撮像画像の撮像日時に限定されない(このことは、第1の実施形態でも同じであるものとする)。例えば、オペレータが、物品管理装置1200のユーザインターフェースを操作することにより、位置固定物品が現在の位置に置かれた日時の情報を、物品管理装置1200に入力してもよい。本実施形態では、登録時刻の欄に記憶される情報が、物品が現在の位置に置かれた日時を取得するための動作が行われた日時の一例である。 The registration time column of the management table 2400 stores information indicating the date and time (timing determined from the date and time) when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position. Note that the date and time when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position refers to the date and time when the operation for acquiring the date and time was performed. In the registration time column, for example, the imaging date and time of the first captured image is stored. However, the information stored in the registration time column is not limited to the imaging date and time of the first captured image (this also applies to the first embodiment). For example, the operator may input information on the date and time when the position-fixed article was placed at the current position to the article management device 1200 by operating the user interface of the article management device 1200. In this embodiment, the information stored in the registration time column is an example of the date and time when an operation to obtain the date and time when the article was placed at the current position was performed.
 前述したように、構造材2201a~2201bに表示されているID2202a~2202bは、塗装等により見えなくなる。また、管2301aに表示されているID2302は地中に埋められて見えなくなる。このような場合でも、オペレータは、登録時刻の欄に記憶されている情報により、位置固定物品が据え付けられてからの経過時間を把握することができる。したがって、例えば、位置固定物品が据え付けられてからの経過時間によって、位置固定物品の修理または交換が必要であるか否かを判断することができる。また、IDの欄および物品位置の欄に記憶されている情報により、どの位置固定物品がどの位置に存在するのかを、ID2202a~2202b、2302を視認することができる状態であるか否かに関わらず把握することができる。したがって、修理または交換が必要な位置固定物品が、どのような位置固定物品であり、どの位置にあるのかを把握することができる。よって、管理テーブル2400に記憶されている情報を、例えば、ID(物品を一意に識別するための情報)を視認することができない状態にある位置固定物品の修理および交換に役立てることができる。 As described above, the IDs 2202a to 2202b displayed on the structural members 2201a to 2201b become invisible due to painting or the like. Further, the ID 2302 displayed on the pipe 2301a is buried underground and becomes invisible. Even in such a case, the operator can grasp the elapsed time since the position-fixed article was installed based on the information stored in the registration time column. Therefore, for example, it can be determined whether the position-fixing article needs to be repaired or replaced, based on the elapsed time since the position-fixing article was installed. Also, based on the information stored in the ID column and the article position column, it is possible to determine which position-fixed article exists in which position, regardless of whether or not the IDs 2202a to 2202b and 2302 are visible. You can understand it without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to grasp what kind of position-fixed article is the position-fixed article that requires repair or replacement, and at what position. Therefore, the information stored in the management table 2400 can be used, for example, to repair or replace a position-fixed article whose ID (information for uniquely identifying the article) cannot be visually recognized.
 尚、管理テーブル2400の非現品表示の欄には、物品位置の欄および登録時刻の欄以外の欄が含まれていてもよい。例えば、管理テーブル2400の非現品表示の欄には、第1の実施形態の管理テーブル1300と同様に、物品内位置の欄および親IDの欄が記憶されていてもよい。尚、第1の実施形態では、物品内位置が、厚板における所定の位置(頂点203、204)を原点とする位置である場合を例示した。位置固定物品の表面の所定の位置に、当該原点を示す印が表示されてもよい。当該印の表示には、例えば、塗料が用いられる。また、位置固定物品の対称軸(中心軸)に平行な直線が、位置固定物品の表面に表示されてもよい。当該直線の表示には、例えば、塗料が用いられる。このようにする場合、第1の撮像装置は、位置固定物品のID表示領域と、当該印と、当該直線と、を、含む第1の撮像画像を撮像する。このようにする場合、当該印が表示されている位置を原点とする位置が物品内位置になる。また、当該直線が図14および図15に示すy軸に対応する。尚、図14に示すx軸および図15に示すz軸に対応する直線が位置固定物品の表面に表示されていてもよい。また、管においては、管の外径に応じた曲率を考慮して図14に示すx軸および図15に示すz軸における原点からの距離が定められるようにする。 Note that the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may include columns other than the article position column and the registration time column. For example, the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may store a column of position within the article and a column of parent ID, similar to the management table 1300 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, an example is given in which the position within the article is a position whose origin is a predetermined position (vertex 203, 204) on the thick plate. A mark indicating the origin may be displayed at a predetermined position on the surface of the position-fixed article. For example, paint is used to display the mark. Further, a straight line parallel to the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the position-fixing article may be displayed on the surface of the position-fixing article. For example, paint is used to display the straight line. In this case, the first imaging device captures a first image that includes the ID display area of the position-fixed article, the mark, and the straight line. In this case, the position where the mark is displayed becomes the position within the article. Further, the straight line corresponds to the y-axis shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. Note that straight lines corresponding to the x-axis shown in FIG. 14 and the z-axis shown in FIG. 15 may be displayed on the surface of the position-fixed article. Further, for the tube, the distance from the origin on the x-axis shown in FIG. 14 and the z-axis shown in FIG. 15 is determined in consideration of the curvature according to the outer diameter of the tube.
 また、管理テーブル2400の非現品表示の欄には、第1の実施形態の<<第5の変形例>>で説明した物品方向の欄が含まれていてもよい。なお、管には板面がない。したがって、例えば、管の対称軸(中心軸)と基準面とのなす角度が物品方向の欄に記憶される。このようにする場合、例えば、ID2302は、複数の構成要素(図23に示す例では「4312」)が並ぶ方向が予め定められた方向(例えば管2301aの対称軸(中心軸)に平行な方向)となるように、管2301aの表面に表示されるようにする。 Furthermore, the non-product display column of the management table 2400 may include the article direction column described in <<Fifth Modification>> of the first embodiment. Note that the tube does not have a plate surface. Therefore, for example, the angle between the axis of symmetry (central axis) of the tube and the reference plane is stored in the article orientation column. In this case, for example, the ID 2302 indicates that the direction in which the plurality of components ("4312" in the example shown in FIG. ) is displayed on the surface of the tube 2301a.
 また、位置固定物品のIDと、当該位置固定物品の三次元位置と、が設計図面から特定される場合、物品位置とは別に物品想定位置の欄が管理テーブル2400の非現品表示の欄に含まれてもよい。物品想定位置の欄には、設計図面から特定される位置固定物品の三次元位置が記憶される。 In addition, when the ID of a position-fixed article and the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article are specified from the design drawing, a column for the assumed article position is included in the non-actual item display column of the management table 2400 in addition to the article position. You may be In the article assumed position column, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified from the design drawing is stored.
 第1の実施形態では、第1の画像取得部1201、認識部1202、入手部1203、照合部1204、特定部1205、位置導出部1206、記憶部1207、出力部1208、および第2の画像取得部1209は、ステンシル(ラベル)による表示領域を用いた処理を行う。これに対し本実施形態では、第1の画像取得部1201、認識部1202、入手部1203、照合部1204、特定部1205、位置導出部1206、記憶部1207、出力部1208、および第2の画像取得部1209は、構造材のID表示領域および管のID表示領域を用いた処理を行う。 In the first embodiment, a first image acquisition unit 1201, recognition unit 1202, acquisition unit 1203, matching unit 1204, identification unit 1205, position derivation unit 1206, storage unit 1207, output unit 1208, and second image acquisition unit A unit 1209 performs processing using a display area using a stencil (label). In contrast, in this embodiment, the first image acquisition unit 1201, the recognition unit 1202, the acquisition unit 1203, the matching unit 1204, the identification unit 1205, the position derivation unit 1206, the storage unit 1207, the output unit 1208, and the second image The acquisition unit 1209 performs processing using the structural material ID display area and the pipe ID display area.
 したがって、本実施形態では、図25のステップS2505において、特定部1205は、ステップS2504の照合の結果に基づいて、管理テーブル2300において管理されている位置固定物品から1つの位置固定物品を特定する。 Therefore, in this embodiment, in step S2505 of FIG. 25, the specifying unit 1205 specifies one position-fixed article from the position-fixed articles managed in the management table 2300, based on the result of the collation in step S2504.
 また、本実施形態では、位置導出部1206は、被据付領域に据え付けられた位置固定物品の三次元位置を導出する。したがって、例えば、どの位置固定物品がどの位置に据え付けられるのかが設計図面から予め想定される場合、図25のステップS2508の判定は実行されなくてもよい。このようにする場合、物品管理装置1200は、第2の画像取得部1209を有していなくてもよい。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article installed in the installation area. Therefore, for example, if it is assumed in advance from the design drawing which position-fixing article will be installed at which position, the determination in step S2508 in FIG. 25 may not be performed. In this case, the article management device 1200 does not need to include the second image acquisition unit 1209.
 また、ステップS2509において、位置導出部1206は、第1の実施形態と同様に、位置固定物品のID表示領域と、第1の撮像装置と、の幾何学的な位置関係を表す数式を用いて、位置固定物品の三次元位置を導出してもよい。なお、管のID表示領域と、第1の撮像装置と、の幾何学的な位置関係を表す数式は、管の表面の曲率を用いて表される。また、位置固定物品のID表示領域の情報(寸法)と、第1の撮像装置の情報(撮像素子の画素数およびサイズおよび焦点距離)と、を用いて位置固定物品のID表示領域と第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出してもよい。なお、第1の実施形態で説明したように、管のID表示領域と第1の撮像装置との三次元的な位置関係を導出する際には、位置固定物品のID表示領域の情報として、管のID表示領域の形状および寸法と、管の表面の曲率と、が用いられる。また、輝度画像および距離画像を用いて、位置固定物品の三次元位置を導出してもよい。 Further, in step S2509, the position deriving unit 1206 uses a mathematical formula expressing the geometric positional relationship between the ID display area of the position-fixed article and the first imaging device, as in the first embodiment. , the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be derived. Note that the mathematical expression representing the geometrical positional relationship between the ID display area of the tube and the first imaging device is expressed using the curvature of the surface of the tube. Furthermore, the ID display area of the position-fixed article and the first A three-dimensional positional relationship with the imaging device may be derived. Note that, as described in the first embodiment, when deriving the three-dimensional positional relationship between the ID display area of the tube and the first imaging device, as information on the ID display area of the position-fixed article, The shape and dimensions of the ID display area of the tube and the curvature of the surface of the tube are used. Furthermore, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be derived using the brightness image and the distance image.
 また、位置導出部1206は、以上のようにして導出した位置固定物品の三次元位置と、管理テーブルの非現品表示の欄の物品想定位置の欄に記憶されている三次元位置と、の差が所定の範囲内であるか否かを判定してもよい。この場合、以上のようにして導出した位置固定物品の三次元位置と、管理テーブルの非現品表示の欄の物品想定位置の欄に記憶されている三次元位置と、の差が所定の範囲内でない場合、ステップS2512の処理が行われるようにしてもよい。 The position derivation unit 1206 also calculates the difference between the three-dimensional position of the fixed article derived as described above and the three-dimensional position stored in the assumed article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table. It may be determined whether or not is within a predetermined range. In this case, the difference between the three-dimensional position of the fixed article derived as described above and the three-dimensional position stored in the assumed article position column of the non-actual item display column of the management table is within a predetermined range. If not, the process of step S2512 may be performed.
 また、位置導出部1206は、ステップS2509において以下の処理を行ってもよい。すなわち、位置導出部1206は、管理テーブルの非現品表示の欄の物品想定位置の欄のうち、ステップS2505で特定された位置固定物品に対応する欄に記憶されている三次元位置を、ステップS2505で特定された位置固定物品の三次元位置として導出してもよい。ただし、このようにして位置固定物品の三次元位置が導出されるようにすると、位置固定物品が設計通りの位置に据え付けられていない場合に、位置固定物品の三次元位置として正しい位置が導出されない場合がある。したがって、このようにして位置固定物品の三次元位置が導出されるようにする場合、作業員(オペレータ)は、S2511において出力される位置固定物品の三次元位置を示す情報に基づいて、当該三次元位置に当該位置固定物品が据え付けられているのかを確認するのが好ましい。 Additionally, the position derivation unit 1206 may perform the following processing in step S2509. That is, the position deriving unit 1206 calculates the three-dimensional position stored in the column corresponding to the position-fixed article specified in step S2505 in the article assumed position column in the non-actual product display column of the management table in step S2505. It may also be derived as the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article specified in . However, if the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article is derived in this way, if the position-fixed article is not installed at the designed position, the correct three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article will not be derived. There are cases. Therefore, when the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article is derived in this way, the worker (operator) calculates the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article based on the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article output in S2511. It is preferable to confirm whether the position fixing article is installed in its original position.
 また、本実施形態では、位置導出部1206は、被据付領域に据え付けられた位置固定物品の三次元位置を導出する。したがって、ステップS2509において位置導出部1206によって位置固定物品の三次元位置が導出された後、当該位置固定物品の三次元位置は必ずしも更新される必要はない。図17のステップS1710、S1713に示す「更新」が図25のステップS2510、S2513において「記憶」となっているのはこのことを示す。ただし、ステップS2509において位置導出部1206によって位置固定物品の三次元位置が導出された後、当該位置固定物品の三次元位置が更新されてもよい。例えば、作業員(オペレータ)は、ステップS2511において出力される位置固定物品の三次元位置を示す情報に基づいて、当該三次元位置が明らかに実際の三次元位置と異なる場合、当該位置固定物品の三次元位置の再導出を物品管理装置1200に対して指示してもよい。この場合、図25のフローチャートによる処理が再び実行され、ステップS2510において、当該位置固定物品の三次元位置が更新され得る。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article installed in the installation area. Therefore, after the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article is derived by the position derivation unit 1206 in step S2509, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article does not necessarily need to be updated. This is indicated by the fact that "update" shown in steps S1710 and S1713 in FIG. 17 is changed to "storage" in steps S2510 and S2513 in FIG. 25. However, after the position derivation unit 1206 derives the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article in step S2509, the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article may be updated. For example, based on the information indicating the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article output in step S2511, if the three-dimensional position is clearly different from the actual three-dimensional position, the worker (operator) The article management device 1200 may be instructed to derive the three-dimensional position again. In this case, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 25 is executed again, and the three-dimensional position of the position-fixed article can be updated in step S2510.
 以上のように本実施形態では、物品管理装置1200は、地面・地中に据え付けられた位置固定物品に表示されている情報であって、当該位置固定物品の製造メーカによって管理されているIDが表示された表示領域を含む第1の撮像画像を取得する。物品管理装置1200は、当該取得した第1の撮像画像と、当該第1の撮像画像を撮像した第1の撮像装置の位置と、に基づいて、位置固定物品のID表示領域の三次元位置を導出し、当該三次元位置を示す情報を、当該位置固定物品のIDと関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する。したがって、例えば、位置固定物品が据え付けられた後に、位置固定物品に表示されている情報を確認することが現実的に不可能になる場合であっても、どの位置固定物品がどの位置にあるのかを管理することができる。よって、被据付領域に据え付けられた位置固定物品の位置を適切に管理することができる。
 尚、被据付領域に据え付けられた物品は、図22に示す構造材および図23に示す管に限定されない。また、本実施形態においても第1の実施形態で説明した種々の変形例を採用してもよい。
As described above, in the present embodiment, the article management device 1200 stores information displayed on a position-fixed article installed on the ground or underground, and the ID managed by the manufacturer of the position-fixed article. A first captured image including the displayed display area is acquired. The article management device 1200 determines the three-dimensional position of the ID display area of the position-fixed article based on the acquired first captured image and the position of the first imaging device that captured the first captured image. Information indicating the three-dimensional position is stored in a storage medium in association with the ID of the position-fixed article. Thus, for example, which position-fixing articles are in which positions, even if it becomes practically impossible to check the information displayed on the position-fixing articles after the position-fixing articles have been installed. can be managed. Therefore, the position of the position fixing article installed in the installation area can be appropriately managed.
Note that the articles installed in the installation area are not limited to the structural material shown in FIG. 22 and the pipe shown in FIG. 23. In addition, various modifications described in the first embodiment may be adopted in this embodiment as well.
(その他の変形例)
 尚、以上説明した本発明の実施形態は、コンピュータがプログラムを実行することによって実現することができる。また、前記プログラムを記録したコンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体及び前記プログラム等のコンピュータプログラムプロダクトも本発明の実施形態として適用することができる。記録媒体としては、例えば、フレキシブルディスク、ハードディスク、光ディスク、光磁気ディスク、CD-ROM、磁気テープ、不揮発性のメモリカード、ROM等を用いることができる。また、本発明の実施形態は、PLC(Programmable Logic Controller)により実現されてもよいし、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit)等の専用のハードウェアにより実現されてもよい。
 また、以上説明した本発明の実施形態は、何れも本発明を実施するにあたっての具体化の例を示したものに過ぎず、これらによって本発明の技術的範囲が限定的に解釈されてはならないものである。すなわち、本発明はその技術思想、またはその主要な特徴から逸脱することなく、様々な形で実施することができる。
(Other variations)
Note that the embodiments of the present invention described above can be realized by a computer executing a program. Furthermore, a computer-readable recording medium on which the program is recorded and a computer program product such as the program can also be applied as an embodiment of the present invention. As the recording medium, for example, a flexible disk, hard disk, optical disk, magneto-optical disk, CD-ROM, magnetic tape, nonvolatile memory card, ROM, etc. can be used. Further, embodiments of the present invention may be realized by a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) or by dedicated hardware such as an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit).
Furthermore, the embodiments of the present invention described above are merely examples of implementation of the present invention, and the technical scope of the present invention should not be construed as limited by these. It is something. That is, the present invention can be implemented in various forms without departing from its technical idea or its main features.
(ハードウェア)
 物品管理装置1200のハードウェアの一例について説明する。図26において、物品管理装置1200は、CPU2601、主記憶装置2602、補助記憶装置2603、通信回路2604、信号処理回路2605、画像処理回路2606、I/F回路2607、ユーザインターフェース2608、ディスプレイ2609、およびバス2610を有する。
(hardware)
An example of the hardware of the article management device 1200 will be explained. In FIG. 26, the article management device 1200 includes a CPU 2601, a main storage device 2602, an auxiliary storage device 2603, a communication circuit 2604, a signal processing circuit 2605, an image processing circuit 2606, an I/F circuit 2607, a user interface 2608, a display 2609, and It has a bus 2610.
 CPU2601は、物品管理装置1200の全体を統括制御する。CPU2601は、主記憶装置2602をワークエリアとして用いて、補助記憶装置2603に記憶されているプログラムを実行する。主記憶装置2602は、データを一時的に格納する。補助記憶装置2603は、CPU2601によって実行されるプログラムの他、各種のデータを記憶する。なお、CPU以外のプロセッサ(例えばGPU)が用いられてもよい。 The CPU 2601 centrally controls the entire article management device 1200. The CPU 2601 uses the main storage device 2602 as a work area to execute programs stored in the auxiliary storage device 2603. Main storage device 2602 temporarily stores data. The auxiliary storage device 2603 stores various data in addition to programs executed by the CPU 2601. Note that a processor other than the CPU (eg, GPU) may be used.
 通信回路2604は、物品管理装置1200の外部との通信を行うための回路である。通信回路2604は、物品管理装置1200の外部と無線通信を行っても有線通信を行ってもよい。 The communication circuit 2604 is a circuit for communicating with the outside of the article management device 1200. The communication circuit 2604 may perform wireless communication or wired communication with the outside of the article management device 1200.
 信号処理回路2605は、通信回路2604で受信された信号や、CPU2601による制御に従って入力した信号に対し、各種の信号処理を行う。
 画像処理回路2606は、CPU2601による制御に従って入力した信号に対し、各種の画像処理を行う。この画像処理が行われた信号は、例えば、ディスプレイ2609に出力される。
 ユーザインターフェース2608は、オペレータが物品管理装置1200に対して指示を行う部分である。ユーザインターフェース2608は、例えば、ボタン、スイッチ、およびダイヤル等を有する。また、ユーザインターフェース2608は、ディスプレイ2609を用いたグラフィカルユーザインターフェースを有していてもよい。
The signal processing circuit 2605 performs various signal processing on the signals received by the communication circuit 2604 and the signals input under the control of the CPU 2601.
The image processing circuit 2606 performs various image processing on the input signal under the control of the CPU 2601. The signal subjected to this image processing is output to, for example, a display 2609.
The user interface 2608 is a part through which an operator gives instructions to the article management device 1200. User interface 2608 includes, for example, buttons, switches, dials, and the like. Further, the user interface 2608 may include a graphical user interface using a display 2609.
 ディスプレイ2609は、画像処理回路2606から出力された信号に基づく画像を表示する。I/F回路2607は、I/F回路2607に接続される装置との間でデータのやり取りを行う。図26では、I/F回路2607に接続される装置として、ユーザインターフェース2608およびディスプレイ2609を示す。しかしながら、I/F回路2607に接続される装置は、これらに限定されない。例えば、可搬型の記憶媒体がI/F回路2607に接続されてもよい。また、ユーザインターフェース2608の少なくとも一部およびディスプレイ2609は、物品管理装置1200の外部にあってもよい。
 出力部1208は、例えば、通信回路2604および信号処理回路2605と、画像処理回路2606、I/F回路2607、およびディスプレイ2609との少なくとも何れか一方を用いることにより実現される。
Display 2609 displays an image based on the signal output from image processing circuit 2606. The I/F circuit 2607 exchanges data with devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607. FIG. 26 shows a user interface 2608 and a display 2609 as devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607. However, the devices connected to the I/F circuit 2607 are not limited to these. For example, a portable storage medium may be connected to the I/F circuit 2607. Furthermore, at least a portion of the user interface 2608 and the display 2609 may be located outside the article management device 1200.
The output unit 1208 is realized, for example, by using at least one of the communication circuit 2604, the signal processing circuit 2605, the image processing circuit 2606, the I/F circuit 2607, and the display 2609.
 尚、CPU2601、主記憶装置2602、補助記憶装置2603、信号処理回路2605、画像処理回路2606、およびI/F回路2607は、バス2610に接続される。これらの構成要素間の通信は、バス2610を介して行われる。また、物品管理装置1200のハードウェアは、前述した物品管理装置1200の機能を実現することができれば、図26に示すものに限定されない。 Note that the CPU 2601, main storage device 2602, auxiliary storage device 2603, signal processing circuit 2605, image processing circuit 2606, and I/F circuit 2607 are connected to the bus 2610. Communication between these components occurs via bus 2610. Further, the hardware of the article management device 1200 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 26 as long as it can realize the functions of the article management device 1200 described above.
 本発明は、例えば、物品の位置を管理することに利用することができる。 The present invention can be used, for example, to manage the location of articles.

Claims (11)

  1.  物品の位置を管理する物品管理装置であって、
     前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得手段と、
     前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得手段と、
     前記画像取得手段により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出手段と、
     前記位置導出手段により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得手段により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶手段と、を有することを特徴とする物品管理装置。
    An article management device that manages the location of articles,
    one or more image acquisition means for acquiring a captured image of an area including display information displayed on the article;
    identification information acquisition means for acquiring identification information of the article;
    position derivation means for deriving an information display position that is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition means;
    It is characterized by comprising a storage means for storing the information display position on the article derived by the position derivation means in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired by the identification information acquisition means. Goods management device.
  2.  前記物品に表示されている前記表示情報には、当該物品の識別情報が含まれており、
     前記識別情報取得手段は、
     前記画像取得手段により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記物品の識別情報を認識する認識手段と、
     前記記憶手段に記憶されている前記物品の識別情報を入手する入手手段と、の少なくとも1つの手段を有することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の物品管理装置。
    The display information displayed on the article includes identification information of the article,
    The identification information acquisition means includes:
    recognition means for recognizing identification information of the article based on the captured image acquired by the image acquisition means;
    The article management apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising at least one means for acquiring identification information of the article stored in the storage means.
  3.  前記物品の識別情報と関連付けられて前記記憶媒体に記憶されている前記情報表示位置は、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置に関する情報として、当該物品の所定の位置を基準とする三次元位置に関する情報を含み、
     前記画像取得手段により取得される前記撮像画像には、前記物品の所定の位置を含む領域が含まれることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の物品管理装置。
    The information display position stored in the storage medium in association with the identification information of the article is information regarding the three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed. Contains information about location;
    3. The article management device according to claim 2, wherein the captured image acquired by the image acquisition means includes an area including a predetermined position of the article.
  4.  前記識別情報取得手段は、
     前記認識手段と、
     前記入手手段と、
     前記認識手段により認識された前記物品の識別情報と、前記入手手段により入手された前記物品の識別情報とを照合する照合手段と、
     前記照合手段による照合の結果に基づいて、前記画像取得手段により取得された前記撮像画像に含まれる、前記物品の識別情報を特定する特定手段と、を有することを特徴とする請求項2または3に記載の物品管理装置。
    The identification information acquisition means includes:
    The recognition means;
    the acquisition means;
    collation means for collating the identification information of the article recognized by the recognition means and the identification information of the article obtained by the acquisition means;
    Claim 2 or 3, further comprising a specifying means for specifying identification information of the article included in the captured image acquired by the image acquiring means based on a result of the collation by the collating means. The article management device described in .
  5.  前記位置導出手段は、2以上の前記画像取得手段により取得された2以上の撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている前記物品の面の高さ方向の位置を導出することを特徴とする請求項1~4の何れか1項に記載の物品管理装置。 The position derivation means derives the position in the height direction of the surface of the article on which the display information is displayed, based on two or more captured images acquired by the two or more image acquisition means. The article management device according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
  6.  前記記憶手段は、前記位置導出手段により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を前記物品の現在の位置として前記記憶媒体に記憶し、当該物品が当該現在の位置に置かれた日時を、当該物品における前記情報表示位置と関連付けて前記記憶媒体に記憶することを特徴とする請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の物品管理装置。 The storage means stores the information display position of the article derived by the position derivation means in the storage medium as the current position of the article, and records the date and time when the article was placed at the current position. The article management device according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the information is stored in the storage medium in association with the information display position on the article.
  7.  前記物品管理装置は、存在する位置が変わる物品の位置を管理し、
     前記記憶手段は、前記物品における前記情報表示位置と、当該物品の識別情報とが、相互に関連付けられて前記記憶媒体に既に記憶されている場合に、前記位置導出手段により当該物品における前記情報表示位置が新たに導出された場合、前記記憶媒体に既に記憶されている前記情報表示位置を、前記位置導出手段により新たに導出された前記情報表示位置に更新することを特徴とする請求項1~6の何れか1項に記載の物品管理装置。
    The article management device manages the position of an article whose existing position changes,
    When the information display position on the article and the identification information of the article are already stored in the storage medium in association with each other, the storage means causes the position derivation means to display the information on the article. When a position is newly derived, the information display position already stored in the storage medium is updated to the information display position newly derived by the position derivation means. 6. The article management device according to any one of Item 6.
  8.  前記物品管理装置は、被据付領域に据え付けられた物品の位置を管理することを特徴とする請求項1~6の何れか1項に記載の物品管理装置。 The article management device according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the article management device manages the positions of articles installed in the installation area.
  9.  物品の位置を管理する物品管理方法であって、
     前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得工程と、
     前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得工程と、
     前記画像取得工程により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出工程と、
     前記位置導出工程により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得工程により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶工程と、を有することを特徴とする物品管理方法。
    An article management method for managing the location of articles, the method comprising:
    one or more image acquisition steps of acquiring captured images of a region including display information displayed on the article;
    an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article;
    a position derivation step of deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired in the image acquisition step;
    A storage step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position derivation step in a storage medium in association with identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquisition step. How to manage goods.
  10.  物品に表示される表示情報と、
     前記物品に表示されない非表示情報と、有し、
     前記非表示情報は、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を含み、
     物品管理装置が、前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像に基づいて、当該物品における前記情報表示位置を導出するために用いられる、物品管理用データのデータ構造。
    display information displayed on the goods;
    and has hidden information that is not displayed on the article,
    The hidden information includes an information display position that is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed,
    A data structure of article management data used by an article management device to derive the information display position on the article based on a captured image of a region including display information displayed on the article.
  11.  物品の位置を管理する処理をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムであって、
     前記物品に表示されている表示情報を含む領域の撮像画像を取得する1または2以上の画像取得工程と、
     前記物品の識別情報を取得する識別情報取得工程と、
     前記画像取得工程により取得された前記撮像画像に基づいて、前記表示情報が表示されている三次元位置である情報表示位置を導出する位置導出工程と、
     前記位置導出工程により導出された前記物品における前記情報表示位置を、前記識別情報取得工程により取得された当該物品の識別情報と関連付けて記憶媒体に記憶する記憶工程と、をコンピュータに実行させることを特徴とするプログラム。
    A program for causing a computer to execute processing for managing the location of articles,
    one or more image acquisition steps of acquiring captured images of a region including display information displayed on the article;
    an identification information acquisition step of acquiring identification information of the article;
    a position derivation step of deriving an information display position, which is a three-dimensional position where the display information is displayed, based on the captured image acquired in the image acquisition step;
    causing a computer to execute a storing step of storing the information display position on the article derived in the position deriving step in a storage medium in association with the identification information of the article acquired in the identification information acquiring step; Featured programs.
PCT/JP2022/022082 2022-05-31 2022-05-31 Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program WO2023233506A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2022/022082 WO2023233506A1 (en) 2022-05-31 2022-05-31 Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program
JP2023577460A JPWO2023233506A5 (en) 2022-05-31 Item management device, item management method, and program

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2022/022082 WO2023233506A1 (en) 2022-05-31 2022-05-31 Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023233506A1 true WO2023233506A1 (en) 2023-12-07

Family

ID=89025945

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/022082 WO2023233506A1 (en) 2022-05-31 2022-05-31 Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023233506A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008117356A1 (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-10-02 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Article monitoring system
JP2012158460A (en) * 2011-02-02 2012-08-23 Fujitsu Ltd Stacking-up determining method and stacking-up determining device
JP2017214195A (en) * 2016-05-31 2017-12-07 株式会社リコー Management system, management method and transfer system
JP2019174959A (en) * 2018-03-27 2019-10-10 Awl株式会社 Commodity shelf position registration program and information processing apparatus

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008117356A1 (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-10-02 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Article monitoring system
JP2012158460A (en) * 2011-02-02 2012-08-23 Fujitsu Ltd Stacking-up determining method and stacking-up determining device
JP2017214195A (en) * 2016-05-31 2017-12-07 株式会社リコー Management system, management method and transfer system
JP2019174959A (en) * 2018-03-27 2019-10-10 Awl株式会社 Commodity shelf position registration program and information processing apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023233506A1 (en) 2023-12-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20200279389A1 (en) Object measurement system
CN105480864B (en) Automatic detecting and calibrating system and method for container crane
CN110039543B (en) Storage map rapid determination method, equipment, storage medium and robot
CN105431370B (en) For method and system container automatically unloaded using container crane in unloading target
US10290115B2 (en) Device and method for determining the volume of an object moved by an industrial truck
WO2016146887A1 (en) Arrangement, method, apparatus, and software for inspecting a container
CN112528721B (en) Bridge crane integrated card safety positioning method and system
WO2009052854A1 (en) Device, method and system for recording inspection data about a freight container
CN110837814A (en) Vehicle navigation method, device and computer readable storage medium
CN111891927B (en) First floor container placement method and computer readable storage medium
JP2006300929A (en) Device for recognizing three-dimensional position of object, and depalettizing system
JP6481178B2 (en) Crane remote operation method and crane remote operation device
US20230257239A1 (en) Systems and methods for verifying building material objects
JP7288231B2 (en) Tracking device, tracking method and program
KR101059927B1 (en) Apparatus and method for pallet position recognition of unmanned conveying equipment
WO2020194234A1 (en) Systems and methods for mapping locations of cartons in pallets and containers
WO2023233506A1 (en) Article management device, article management method, data structure of data for article management, and program
CN205472298U (en) Automatic calibration system that detects of container crane
JP2009236784A (en) Apparatus, method and mark for detecting position
TW202349152A (en) Goods management device, goods management method, and data structure and program for goods management data characterized in that the goods management device derives the three-dimensional position of the display area of the label based on the first photographed image and the position of the first photographing device that photographs the first photographed image
CN114819821A (en) Goods warehouse-out checking method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
Kobata et al. Development of automatic parcel delivery system using image processing techniques
JPH08304025A (en) Position measuring method for rectangular load
KR102588246B1 (en) System for monitoring shipyard stockyard using drone image and method thereof
EP3692332B1 (en) Determining object attributes using photoelectric sensors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023577460

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22944054

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1